高三英语语法教案[下学期]

语法复习专题（12）
Unit12 定语从句
一、考点聚焦
1、功能：相当于形容词，修饰名词或代词，在句中作定语
2、位置：定语从句置于被修饰词之后
Those who are willing to attend the party, sign here please.
3、先行词：被定语从句修饰的词称为先行词
（1）先行词一般是名词和不定代词，如:some-, any-, every-和no与-boy, -thing的合成词；或all、none、any、some、that、those等代词。数词也可以作先行词，人称代词也同样可作先行词。
（2）先行词与关系词是等量关系。必须注意两点：
①先行词在从句中作主语时，从句谓语动词的数由先行词而定。
This is the place which is worth visiting.
②关系词在从句句子中充当了成分，其意思就是先行词的意义，所以在从句中不能重复其意。
There are many places we can visit（them）in China.
4、关系词：引导定语从句的都称关系词
关系代词：who, whom, which, that, whose, as。
关系副词：when, where, why。that偶尔也作关系副词。
5、确定关系词的步骤
（1）先找关系词，看先行词指的是什么。
（2）看关系词在从句中所充当的成分。
6、在定语从句中，当先行词指物时，下列情况的关系词宜用that而不用which
（1）先行词被①形容词最高级 ②序数词 ③数词几种词修饰或被 ④only、any、few、little、no、all、one of等修饰时。
（2）先行词为all、much、little、none、few、one、something、anything等不定代词时。
（3）先行词中既有人又有物时。
He was looking pleasantly at te children and parcels that filled his bus.
（4）先行词在主句中作表语关系词在从句中作表语时。
The village is no longer the one that was 5 years ago.
（5）当主句中含有疑问词which时。
Which are the books that you bought for me
7、宜用which而不用that的情况
（1）在非限制性定语从句中
（2）在关系词前有介词时
（3）当先行词本身是that时
（4）当关系词离先行词较远时
8、关系词who与that指人时，也有不同情况分别用不同的关系词
（1）当主句是there be句型时，关系词用who。
（2）先行词是为anyone、those、someone、everyone、one等词时，关系词用who。
（3）当主句是who作疑问词时，关系词用that。
Who is that girl that is standing by the window
（4）whom在从句中只作宾语，可被who取代。
9、whose作关系词既指人又指物，在从句中作定语。如：
Do you know Mr.Smith whose story is very moving
There is a room, whose window faces the river.
There is a room, the window of which faces the river.
10、关系代词as,在从句中作主语、宾语和表语。
（1）先行词被such和the same修饰，或句型as many（much）中，从句都用as 引导。
Such books as you bought are useful.
The school is just the same as it was 10 years age.
注意：区别①such … that … 引导的结果状语从句。They are such
lovely children that we love them much.②the same … that … 引导定语从句。I want to use the same tool that you used just now.
（2）无先行词的定语从句用as和which引导。
区别：①意义上：as 含有“这点正如……一样”。②位置上：as 从句可置句首，也可在另处。
He didn’t pass the exam, as we had expected.
There is lots of air in loose snow, which can keep the cold out.
As is known, the earth is round, not flat.
11、关系副词when与where、why、that
when 指时间 = in / at / on / during which
where指地点 = in / at / from / which
why指原因 = for which
当先行词为way、day、reason、time时，可用that作关系副词。（非正式场合）
I don’t like the way that / in which / he talks.
当time作先行词时，关系词可以省掉。
This is the first time I have given you a lesson in French.
12、必须注意的问题
（1）关系词作主语时，从句中谓语的数。
（2）注意区别定语从句与强调句。
①定语从句中关系词作从句成分，复合句。
②强调it无意义，that / who不是引导词。
③强调it is / was和that / who后如果句子意思讲得通则是强调句，讲不通则不是。
It is the museum that / which we visited last year.(定语从句)
It was in the hotel that we stayed last night.（强调句）
（3）定语从句与同位语从句的区别。
①定语从句引导词被称为关系词，that充当主语、宾语、表语。有时可省略。
②同位语从句引导词被叫做连词，that不能充当任何成分，不可省。
Word came that their army was defeated.(同位语)
We expressed to them our wish that was the same as their.(定语)
（4）关系词在从句中省略的情况。
①关系词作宾语，前无介词时。
②关系词作表语。
（5）限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句的翻译。
（6）关系词前有介词或复杂介词，关系词只能是which和whom。
（7）几个特殊的定语从句句型：
①He is the only one of the students who has got very good marks
in the match.（句中one为先行词）
He is one of the students who have got good marks in the match.（句中students为先行词）
②Is this place the one (that) we visited yesterday
Is this the place(that / which)we visited yesterday
③He stood at the window, from where he could see what was happening.
④It may rain, in which case the match will be put off.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The film brought the hours back to me _________ I was taken good care of in that faraway village.（NMET 2001）
A.until B.that C.when D.where
解析：答案为C。本题考查分隔定语从句的关系词的选择。作好本题的关键是要能辨认出该定语从句的先行词the hours和关系词被介词短语to me所分隔。定语从句的先行词是表时间的名词hours, 并且关系词在从句中用作状语，故应选择表示时间的关系副词when。
2. ___________ is known to everybody, the noon travels around the earth once every month.(NMET 2001)
A.It B.As C.That D.What
解析：答案为B。本题考查as引导的非限制定语从句。as作“正如……”解时，引导的非限制性定语从句来修饰整个句子。当as在从句中作主语时，常用于下列短语：as is known、as is said、as is reported、as is announced等。要注意掌握作关系代词引导定语从句的用法。
3. After living in Pairs for fifty years he returned to the small town ___________ he grew up as a child.(NMET 1996)
A.which B.where C.that D.when
解析：答案为B。本题考查限制性定语从句中关系词的选择。定语从句的先行词是表示地点的名词短语the small town, 且关系词不作定语从句中的主语和宾语而作地点状语，因此定语从句必须用关系副词where引导。要注意分清先行词在从句中充当的成分，然后选择适当的关系词。
4.The English play my students acted at the New Year’s party was a great success.
A. for which B. at which C. in which D. on which
解析：答案为C。考定语从句。主句部分应是The English play at the New Year’s party was a great success.从句补全为独立句子应是my students acted in the play。所以应选in which，其余介词不妥。
5.There were dirty marks on her trousers she had wiped her hands.
A. where B. which C. when D. that
解析：答案为A。本题考地点状语从句，用where引导。句意是“她的裤子上她擦过手的地方有脏痕”。此处不能用时间状语从句，排除C，本题易被误认为考定语从句，意为“在她擦过手的裤子上有脏痕”。定语从句修饰trousers，也只能用where。B和D可引导定语从句，但只作主、宾等成分。定语从句缺少状语，不缺主语、宾语，故不可用。
6.The journey around the world took the old sailor nine months, the sailing time was 226 days.
A. of which B. during which C. from which D. for which
解析：答案为A。本题考定语从句，关系代词which指代the journey，定语从句恢复为独立句子应是：The sailing time of the journey was 226 days,故选of which。
*4*语法复习专题（2）
Unit2 冠词
一、考点聚焦
1.不用冠词的情况
（1）专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词、人名、地名等名词前，一般不加冠词。
China , America, Smith
Air is matter.
（2）可数名词前有物主代词、指示代词、名词所有格等限制时，不加冠词。
This dictionary is mine.
（3）季节、月份、星期、节日、假日、一日三餐名称前一般不加冠词。
March, May Day, National Day, Children’s Day, Women’s Day
Have you had supper
Spring is the best season of the year.
（4）称呼语或指家用雇用的nurse、cook等名词前及表示头衔职务的名词作宾语、补语及同位语时，一般不加冠词。
What’s this, Father We made him our chairman.
Ask nurse to put the child to bed. Professor Li.
（5）学科名称、球类、棋类名称前不加冠词。
Do you study physics
He likes playing football/chess.
（6）复数名词表示泛指一类人或事物时前不用冠词。
They are peasants/ workers.
（7）在与by连用的交通工具名称前不加冠词。
by car, by bus,by bike, by train, by air/ water/ land
但：take a bus, come in a boat, on the train/ bus需注意。
（8）某些固定词组中不用冠词。
①名词词组中：
husband and wife, brother and sister, body and soul, day and night, knife and fork
②介词词组中：
to(at, from) school, in (to)class, in (to,at, from)university（college）,to（in, into, from）church, to(in,into, out of)prison(hospital, bed), to(at, from, out of)work, to(in, from) town,at (from)home, to(at)sea, at night(noon, midnight), by car (bus, bicycle, plane), on foot
注意：在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。
in hospital 住院（因病）
in the hospital在医院（工作、参观等）
in front of在前面，指某物体之外
in the front of在前部，指某物之内
in charge负责，主管 out of question没问题
in the charge由……负责 out of the question不可能
（9）as引导的让步状语从句中，作表语的名词不带冠词。
Child as she is, she knows a lot of French.
（10）系动词turn（作“变成”解）后作表语的单数可数名词前习惯不用冠词。
The young girl has turned writer.
= The young girl has become a writer.
（11）在单数名词 + after + 同一单数名词（表示“一个接一个”）结构中，单数可数名词前不加冠词。
She did experiment after experiment.
类似的还有：shop after shop, mistake after mistake
（12）形容词的最高级前、序数词前也有不用定冠词的情况。
①“most + 形容词原级”作“十分、非常、极”解时，前面不用定冠词。
Oh, it’s most beautiful.
②当两个形容词最高级并列修饰同一个名词时，第二个形容词前通常不用定冠词。
She is the tallest and fattest girl in our school.
③当形容词最高级作表语，不表示与其他人或物相比时，其前不用定冠词。
The market in the country is busiest in winter.
④形容词最高级前有名词所有格或物主代词时，不能用定冠词。
A wolf in a sheep’s skin is our most dangerous enemy.
⑤序数词前面一般加定冠词表示“第……”之意，但在second、third等词前加不定冠词表示“又一，再一”之意。
…why you took a second arrow
注意：下句中“a first”表示“第一名、冠军”。
He is a top student in our class, he often gets a first in maths.
（13）no与such连用时应放在such之前，such后面的名词不用冠词。
No such thing has ever happened in this village.
（14）never、ever置于作主语的名词前，这些名词前不用冠词。
Never did student study so hard.这个学生从未学得这么认真。
（15）有时为了节省空间、时间、金钱和精力，或为了引起注意力，省去a(n)或the,这主要用于新闻标题、工商业文件、广告、电报、公告、提纲、书名等。
Conference opens.会议召开了。
2.定冠词的使用情况
（1）使用定冠词的一般情况。
①特指或第二次提到。
②序数词前、最高级前、独一无二的东西前。
③用于表示发明物的单数名词前或某些专有名词前。
（2）定冠词使用特殊的场合。
① He hit him in the face.
beat sb. on the nose, take sb. by the arm, pat sb. on the head② the rich, the poor, the wounded 富人，穷人，伤员
③ the elder of the two, he more beautiful of the two两者中较年长的一位，较漂亮的一个
④ The sooner, the better.越快越好。
⑤ He got paid by the hour.他是按小时付工钱的。
by the yard/the dozen/the month/the year…
但：by weight按重量
⑥ in the 50s /in the 1870s（表示年代）
⑦ the Smiths/the Whites（表示一家人或夫妇俩）
⑧ in the water/field/light/shade/distance/middle/country/
rain
⑨ tell the truth/on the other hand/on the way home
⑩ 当抽象名词表示某一特定内容，特别是当它有一限定性修饰语时，
它与定冠词连用：
She is fond of music.
He is playing the music written by Beethoven.
Good advice is beyond price.
I’m sorry not to have taken the advice he gave.
3.不定冠词常用的几种情况
（1）表示“一”相当于“one”。I’ll return in a day or two.
（2）表示“每”相当于“per”。We have three meals a day.
（3）表示“同一性”相当于“the same”。The children are of an age.
（4）表示类指，表示“某类”。He wants to he a doctor.
（5）表示泛指，相当于“any”。A horse is a useful animal.
（6）表示某一个，相当于“a certain”。A Mr. Smith is asking to see you.
（7）与抽象名词连用，可以表示“一场、一次、一件”，如：a pleasure一件乐事，a surprise一件令人惊讶的事，a joy一件高兴的事，a pity一件遗憾的事，an honour一个（件）经以为荣的人(事)。
（8）与物质名词连用，表示“一种，一阵、一份”。
What a heavy rain!
What a good supper!
Please give me a black coffee!
4.冠词表类别的常见方式
（1）定冠词 + 单数可数名词，表示一个，代表一类。
The computer was invented in 1945.
The TV set was invented by Joan Baird.
The horse is a useful animal.
（2）不定冠词 + 单数可数名词（表示任意一个，某一个）。
A pen is a tool for writing.
A square has four sides.
A horse is a useful animal.
注意：man, woman表示泛指时，不用冠词，且常用单数。如：
Man is fighting a battle against pollution.
Man tries to be the protector of woman.
（3）可数名词或不可数名词，指类别（考虑到同类中的各个情况）。
Horses are useful animals.
Rice is a kind of food.
5.冠词位置问题
（1）不定冠词 + 副词 + 形容词 + 名词。
This is a very interesting story.
（2）such、what、both、all、quite、rather +不定冠词+形容词+名词。
I’ve never seen such a film!
Half a pound of pork,please!
What a good idea it is!
（3）as、so、too、how、however、enough+形容词+不定冠词+名词。
It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent.
I can’t finish the task in so short a time.
This seems not too long a distance.
We wonder how difficult a problem he worked out.
However low te price you paid,you waste your money.
He is brave enough a hunter to kill the bear.
（4）定冠词位置。
①half、twice、three times + the + 名词
He paid twice the price for it.
Their house is three times the size of yours.
②all、both、double + the + 名词
Both the blind men were mistaken.
All the students in our class are eager to know the secret.
I offered him double the amount, but he still refused.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.The warmth of ____________sweater will of course be determined by the sort of ___________wool used.（NMET 2001）
A．The ; the B．the ; / C．/; the D．/; /
解析：答案为B。第一空格为特指，交待the warmth的内容，第二空格为泛指，the sort of wool used所用羊毛的种类。此题有三点需注意：①正确理解sweater 这一句词在句中的类别。②掌握determine在句中作“决定”、“取决于”这个意思。③掌握定冠词表特指的基本用法。
2.Most animals have little connection with_________animals of___________different kind unless they kill them for food.（NMET 2000）
A．the … a B．/ … a C．the … the D．/ … the
解析：答案为B。名词复数表类别，其前不用冠词，故第一个空格不填冠词，表不定概念的“一种”，“某种”要用不定冠词a。要准确掌握冠词表类别的三种表达方式和不定冠词常用的几种情况，见前面要点考点聚
焦内容。
3.Paper money was in___________use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in __________thirteenth century.（NMET1999）
A．the … / B．the … the C．/ … the D．/ … /
解析：答案为C。题中in use是固定搭配，意为“在使用”，use为抽象名词，其前不用冠词。后者是序数词前用定冠词the。要牢记一些固定搭配如in use、under construction（在建设中）、in debt（欠债）、come to power（执政）、on fire（着火）、at table（用餐）、out of work（失业）等。
4.When you come here for your holiday next time don’t go to hotel; I can find you bed in my flat.
A. the; a B. the; 不填 C. a; the D. a; 不填
解析：答案为C。考定语从句。主句部分应是The English play at the New Year’s party was a great success. 从句补全为独立句子就是my students acted in the play.所以应选in which，其余介词不妥。
5.—John, there is Mr. Wilson on the phone for you.
—I’m in bath.
A. a; the B. the; a C. a; 不填 D. the; 不填
解析：答案为A。本题考查冠词用法。a+姓名，表示“一个叫……的人”；in the bath在浴室。
6. Tom owns larger collection of books than any other student in our class.
A. the; 不填 B. a; 不填 C. a; the D. 不填; the
解析：答案为B。考冠词，collection是可数名词，须填冠词，被比较级修饰，但是大范围的比较，故填不定冠词，后一空是泛指的表类别的书，且已用了复数，不填冠词。故选B。
—5—Unit One必会习语
1．What is sb. like
What does sb. look like？
What does sb. like
How does sb like/find sth
2. argue with sb. about sth 因…和某人争执
3. enjoy/hate sth/ doing sth
4. so / nor/ neither + 系动／助动／情动　+ 主语
So it is with...; It is the same with...
5. be into 对…深感兴趣 =be interested in; have/show interest in
5. be fond of 喜欢 care for; like; enjoy;
6. surf the internet 上网冲浪
7. all the time 一直 总是
8. imagine that...; imagine (sb/sb’s) doing sth
imagine sb to be 想像某人是
CHUCK’S　FRIEND
7. cast away 抛弃
8. so…that…/such…that… 如此…以致…
He was so excited that he could not speak.
So excited was he that he could not speak.
It was such a lovely day that we decided to go outing.
It was so lovely a day that we decided to go outing.
It is amusing that such little birds eat so much food.
9. the Pacific Ocean; the Atlantic Ocean;
the Indian Ocean; the arctic Ocean;
10. survive the crash 在空难中幸存
11. a deserted island 荒岛
12. all alone 独自 = all by oneself
区别： alone 单独的；独自的 lonely 孤独的；寂寞的
13. hunt for 搜寻 寻找 search for;
12．make fire 生火
13．in order to 为了 so as to; in order that; so that
14．even though/even if 即使，纵然 as if / as though
15．treat…as/like… 把…当作 regard...as...; think of...as
16．share sth. with sb. 与…分享 share (in) sth 分享
17．care about/for 关心，照顾，喜欢
care to do sth 愿意做；care for sb to do sth 愿意某人做
care + 从句 愿意；介意
18．should have done 本来应该 =ought to have done
19．make friends with 与…交朋友
20．such as 例如 for example；for instance
WORD STUDY & GRAMMAR
21. keep...as a pet
22. regard ...as...; treat...as; think of...as; consider...as/to be
23. be loyal to; be faithful to；be devoted to 忠诚于
24. be quick in mind and action 思维敏捷行动迅速
INTEGRATING　SKILLS
25. have fun； enjoy oneself; have a wonderful time
26. drop me a line 给某人写短信
WORKBOOK
27．keep…in mind 把…记住 learn...by heart; remember
28．in error / by mistake 由于错误或疏忽
29．tie up (one’s hair) 扎起来 do up
30．run into 偶然遇见; 遭遇；与...相撞
come across; meet by chance; happen to meet
31．be proud of 以…而感骄傲 take pride in
32．run a restaurant 开餐馆 start a restaurant
run a business 做生意
33．skip classes 逃课
33．keep an eye on 照顾; 注视；stare at 盯着看
34．make fun of 取笑某人; laugh at
35. It is possible (for sb) to do;
It is possible/probable/likely that...
Sb. + is (most) likely to do sth.
Sth. + is probable
36．be curious about 对…感到好奇 be curious that...
have the curiosity about
37. have problems with 在... 有问题
38. even if you are thousand miles apart即使你们分别在几千英里
39. despite = in spite of 尽管；不管 regardless of
Unit 2 必会习语
Warming up
1. for the first time 第一次；首先 at first; first of all
2. have a good flight （坐飞机）旅途愉快
3. all the way 一路
4. at all　（否定：根本；　疑问：到底；　条件：竟然）
above all 首先；首要的 after all 毕竟； in all 总共
5. make oneself at home 不拘束，　别客气
6. There you are. 你来了。 Here you are. 给你。
ENGLISH AROUND THE WORLD
7. all around the world 世界各地 throughout the world
8. the majority of 大多数的 the minority of
9. in total; in all; altogether 总共
10. the number of …的数量　(large; small 谓语动词单数)
a number of 一些；　许多
11. except for 除了．．．之外；　要不是
except 除了...都； besides 除了...还；except +从句
except （除去）指在整体中除去行为未发生者 （不包括在内）
except for (除了有…之外)指在一个整体中除去其中某个或某些因素，前后两个名词性质不同。
except that (除去；除掉) 后接从句，还有except when, except what; except where等
besides (除了…还) 包括在整体之内
but (除了...之外) 和except 同义，与否定词或疑问词连用
11. communicate with sb. 与．．．交流，联络
12. have a good knowledge of 对．．．很熟悉；　通晓
GRAMMAR 祈使句间接引语
Ask sb (not) to do sth 请某人做/不做某事
Tell sb (not) to do sth 让某人不做某事
Order sb (not) to do sth 命令某人做/不做某事
13. help sb. with sth 在某方面帮助某人
help sb do sth; help do sth; 帮助
assist sb with sth; assist sb to do sth;
assist in doing sth. 协助某人做...
14. stand still 站着不动; stay still; lie still
15. leave the door open 让门一直开着
leave the light on 让灯一直亮着
leave sb doing sth 留置/听任...保持...(做某事)的状态
leave... done 留置/听任...保持...(被...)的状态
16. turn down ／up the radio 　把收音机声音关小／开大
turn up 出现 turn down 拒绝
turn off / on 关掉／打开
turn in 上缴； turn out 结果是；被证明是
17. stay up 熬夜；　不睡觉
Integrating skills　　　　
e about 发生；happen; take place; break out
19. There is no quick answer to this question.
20. in the same way 用同样的方式 in different ways 不同
in this way 这样 in no way 决不
in the way 挡道；妨碍 out of the way 不挡道
in a way 在某种程度上；在某一点上
on the way 在路上；即将发生
by the way 顺便说/问一下；
by way of 经由；经过　　
21. stay the same = remain the same. 保持不变
22．at the same time 同时 =meanwhile
23. end up with 以...（形式）告终 begin/start with
end in failure 以失败而告终　　　　　
24. more or less 或多或少
25. have difficulty/trouble in doing sth 　做某事有困难
26. a great many; many a; a great number of (可数)
a great many factories 区分 a great many of the factories
a great deal of; a large amount of; (不可数)
a large quantity of; large quantities of; plenty of; lots of 　　　　　　　
27. bring in 带来; 引进 bring out 出版；生产；揭露
bring about 引起；导致 bring up 抚养；培养
WORKBOOK
29. shut up 闭嘴
30．pass away 去世
31．promise sb to do sth 答应某人做某事
promise that...
make a promise
32．make a decision 做出决定=decide
33. marry sb; 与某人结婚 get married to sb
be married to sb
34. at least 至少 at most 最多
35. a little bit 区分：a little; a bit; a bit of; not a bit ; not a little
36. chat on line 网上聊天
37. stay in touch ＝keep in touch with sb.= keep track of
保持联系
get in touch with; 取得联系 lose touch with 失去联系
38. because of 区分 because
thanks to 多亏了 as a result of 由于...的结果
due to 由于，因为 owing to 由于；因为
39. not only... but also.. （用于句首时，前句倒装）
Not only did Xiaohua learn a lot of English from her Canadian teacher, she also became very interested in Canada. (前句倒，后句不倒)
Not only the students but also the teacher doesn’t understand this sentence. (并列主语，不倒装，谓语就近一致)
40. as many as; as much as 和...一样多
as many books as as much money as
His son is as naughty a boy as he used to be when he was young.
41. in the name of 以....的名义
Unit 3必会习语
WARMING UP & SPEAKING
1. consider ...( as/to be)... 认为...是
consider sb to have done 认为某人做过某事
consider it +n./adj. for sb to do sth
consider doing sth 考虑要做某事
consider +疑问词 + to do sth 考虑...
consider that从句 认为；考虑
in consideration of 报答；由于
take ...into consideration 顾及，考虑到
under consideration 在考虑中，在研究中
2. means of transportation/transport 交通方式
Every possible means has been tried, but none worked.
All possible means have been tried, ...
by all means 不惜一切 =in all ways
by this means 用这种方法 =in this way
by no means 决不； 一点也不=in no way
by means of 通过， 借助于 = by
3. in time 及时;早晚;总有一天 travel in time 在时空中旅行
on time 准时 in no time 马上；立刻
at that time 那时 at times 有时
for the time being 暂时的
4. prefer sth / to do sth / sb to do sth 更喜欢；较喜欢
prefer doing A to doing B 宁愿做某事
prefer A to B; 喜欢A 胜于B = like A better than B
prefer to do A rather than do B 宁愿做A 而不愿做 B
5. in space 在太空 in outer space 在外部空间
ADVENTURE TRAVEL
6. get away (from) 摆脱； 离开
break away from 脱离 get rid of 去除
7. more and more 越来越…
8. instead of 代替； 而不是 （区分：instead）rather than
9. try doing 试验做 try to do sth 努力去做；试图作
manage to do sth = succeed in doing sth 设法做到了某事
attempt to do sth; make an attempt to do sth 企图做某事
10. get close to 靠近； 接近
11. experience life 体验生活 experience C.n 经历 U.n.经验
12. take exercise 进行锻炼 have sports; do sport
exercise C.n 练习题 (pl) 体操 U.n 锻炼
13. go for a hike = go hiking 去徒步旅行
14. watch out （for...） 留神； 提防
15. protect… from/against … 保护…免受…
16. be careful (not) to do sth 小心(不)做某事
be careful about 注意
be careful with 小心；
17. as with ....也一样 as to / for 至于；关于
18. think about 考虑 think of 想到，想起
think over 仔细考虑 think out 想出
19. go rafting 去漂流
20. unless = if not 除非...否则...
You should not go rafting unless you know how to swim.(条件)
区分：until
You must not get off the bus until it has stopped.(时间)
GRAMMAR
现在进行时表示将来的计划，打算
How are you getting to the airport
一般现在时表示时刻表的将来
My plane leaves at seven this evening.
21. go on separate holidays 分别去度假
22. in a few days’ time = in a few days =a few days later 几天后
after 和 in 的区分
23. go off to ； be off to 动身去 leave for;
24. see sb off 给某人送行 meet sb 接某人
25. take a taxi to 乘出租车 go to ...by taxi
26. have a nice / pleasant trip/journey 祝旅途愉快
27. say “Hi” to sb. for me 代我向某人问好
give my regards to sb
remember me to sb.
28. The same to you. 我也祝愿你。
对比： It’s the same with... ...也一样
It’s all the same to sb 对某人而言是一样的。
I have the same pencil bag as yours/ you have.
29. in the past 在过去 in the old days
30. at present 目前; at the present time; nowadays
31. in the future 在未来；将来 in future 以后
32. used to do sth 过去常做某事
be used to do sth 被用来做 be used for (doing) sth
be used to sth/doing sth 习惯于 get used to doing
INTEGRATING　SKILLS
bine…with… 把…和…结合起来 (为了共同目的合并)
connect...with/to... 把...和...连接起来 （通过媒介物连接）
link...with/to
join...to... （直接连接）
34. on (the) one hand… , on the other hand …
一方面…, 另一方面..
35. so that = in order that 为了…； 以便…
36. learn about 了解； 学习有关…知识
37. as well as =and 也； 又；以及 as well = too
38. by doing sth... 通过作某事 by means of doing
39. make money 挣钱； 赚钱 earn money
40. the four of you 你们四个人
four of you 你们其中的四个人
41. prepare ( sth) for... 为…做准备... get ready for
prepare sb for sth 使某人为某事做好准备
be well prepared (for); 为...做好了充分的准备=be ready for
make preparations for 为...做准备
42. make notes 做笔记 take notes
WORKBOOK
43. take off （飞机）起飞；脱掉（衣帽鞋）
44. go on holiday 去度假 go to (a place) for a holiday
INTEGRATING SKILLS
45. fill…with… 给…充满… be filled with; be full of 充满了
46. the way (in which/that) + 定语从句
the/a way of doing sth = the/a way to do sth 做某事的方法
47. catch up with 赶上 keep up with 跟上；不落后
48. reach out (for sth) 伸手去（拿，碰）
49. pay attention to 注意
focus one’s attention on
call /draw/attract one’s attention to 吸引某人的注意力于
WRITING
50. give away 赠送， 放弃， 泄漏（机密）
give up 放弃 give in (to sb) 屈服
give out 分发；发出（光，热，气，味等）
give off 发出（光，热，气，味等）
51. come up with 提出；想到（主意）；
Unit 4 必会习语
WARMING UP & LISTENING & SPEAKING
1. talk about 谈论； 议论 talk with sb; talk of 提到
2. host the 2008 Olympic Games 举办2000年奥运会
3. take place = come about; happen 发生
4. be caught in (a rain; a traffic jam; the earthquake)
偶然遇上（雨，交通堵塞,地震等）
5. create a dialogue = make up a dialogue 编对话
6. play tennis 打网球
7. for fun = as a joke 开玩笑的；不是认真的；为了取乐的
8. I hope so. I hope not.
9. shout /call for help 呼救
10. go on (a) holiday 去度假 go to...for a holiday
on holiday 在度假
11. on fire 着火 catch fire 着火；set fire to=set...on fire 纵火
make fire 生火
12. I’m afraid of +n. 害怕
I’m afraid that... 担心
I’m afraid to do sth 不敢做某事
I’m afraid of doing sth 害怕做某事
I’m afraid so. 恐怕是这样
I’m afraid not. 恐怕不会。
THE RESCUE
13. a natural disaster 自然灾害
14. hear/see sb. doing sth 听见/看见某人正在做某事
hear/ see sb do sth 听见/看见某人做过某事
(五看二听一感觉)
15. look around 环顾； 四处看
16. advance towards 朝…前进
17. before +从句 还没来得及...
18. be upon 逼近； 临近
19. sweep sb down 把...冲到了
20. drag 拖拉（重物）；（比较艰难缓慢，有阻力）
drag oneself along 拖着沉重的步子走
pull 拉；扯 （应用范围比较广）
pull a tooth 拔牙 pull the door open 拉开门
pull at 拉扯 pull up 拉起来；拉上来
draw 拉（比较从容、平稳不费力）
draw one’s attention 吸引注意；draw a conclusion 得出结论
draw back 后退 draw money from bank 从银行取钱
draw near 就要来临；逼近
21. get on one’s feet （艰难的）站起来 get up; stand up
22. hold on to 抓住
23. pull up 拉起来； 拉上来
24. against the wall 倚着墙
25. fight for 为…而战 struggle for 为…而斗争
26. look into 往…里面看； 浏览； 调查
look into one’s eyes 注视着某人 stare at; fix one’s eyes on;
look sb in the mirror 照镜子
look sb up and down 上下打量某人
20. with a look of fright 害怕的； 恐惧的
21. around the corner 即将来临，on its way; draw near；
in store
22. cut down 砍倒;削减 cut up 切碎 cut off 切断
cut in 插嘴;加塞 cut out 删除;剪下来 cut away 剪掉
23. three meters deep 三米深 three metres in depth
a three-meter-deep hole = a hole of three meters deep
24. sweep away (风) 吹走； （浪） 卷走；
sweep down 吹倒； 席卷； 冲倒
25. work out 计算出；想出（办法）；制定（计划）；
work at 从事；致力于 work on 继续工作；从事于
26. refer to 指的是； 谈到；提到；查阅
WORD　STUDY & GRAMMAR
定语从句：限制性定语从句，非限制性定语从句
27. strike，普通用词，“打一下；打几下”，不一定有意；“敲钟”。 hit，“击中，打，对准”，着重敲打或打击对方的某一点
beat，连续的打击; 如殴打或体罚等；游戏竞赛战争中击败
knock 敲；打 ；撞击
27. advance the deadline 提前最后期限；
28．pull at/on 拉一下
29. seize an opportunity/chance 抓住机会 = grasp/take/grab...
chance 可能性 U.n. & C.n
There is a chance/no chance of sb doing sth
that 从句
The chances /chances are that... 可能...
by chance 偶然
30. （区分：pay; cost; spend; take）
sb pay money for sth
sth cost sb money
sb spend money on sth; sb spend time/money in doing sth
It takes sb time to do sth
31. in town 在城里 in the country(side) 在乡下
go to town 进城 go to the country(side) 下乡
INTEGRATING SKILLS
32．take a photo of sb / sb doing sth 给…照相
33. in a second = in a very shore time
34. a two-day trip 一次两天的旅行
35. the next morning 第二天早上
WORKBOOK
36. on the morning of April 18th, 1906
37. as a result of 由于…的结果 as a consequence of
34. A +动词/be + ten times larger than+B 比…大十倍
A +动词/be +ten times as large as+B 是…的十倍
A +动词/be +ten times the size of+B 是…的十倍
(number/amount/height/length/depth/width/age)
Unit 5 必会习语
SPEAKING
1. while still a student = while she was still a student 还是个学生的时候（状语从句的省略现象）
(you) Don’t talk while (you are) eating.
When (he was) asked how he gained first place, he suddenly
became cheerful.
The boys will go out to play football whenever (it is) possible.
I won’t go to his birthday party unless (I am) invited.
2. play/act a role 扮演角色
play the role of...
play a part/role in... 在...中起作用
3. after graduating/graduation (from...) 毕业以后
4. work as an actress 做演员
5. during/in the 1980s 二十世纪八十年代
6. win a prize 获奖 win a game/a battle/honour
beat/defeat sb 打败某人 win sb. 把某人争取过来
7. get married (to sb); 结婚（瞬间）=marry sb.
be married (to sb) 结婚（延续）
7. in the beginning = at first 开始的时候
反义；in the end = at last; finally; eventually 最后
8. make money 赚钱 earn money
GETTING TO KNOW STEVEN SPIELBERG
9. make a film ／blockbuster／follow-ups 拍电影/巨片／续集
10. The reason……is that….. 原因是…
This is because... 这是因为...
for this reason ; for some reason; for some reasons
the reason for +n./doing sth
the reason why/ for which... 定语从句
reason 与 cause 的区别
cause of the fire/accident
11. work on 从事于； 制作
12. take off 起飞；脱掉；很快上升; 开始流行／畅销
13. by the sea 在海边； by sea 乘船； in the sea 在海里
on the sea 在海面上 at sea 在海上；航海中；茫然
14. be afraid to do sth 不敢作某事
be afraid of doing sth害怕做某事
be afraid that 担心；恐怕
e from outer space 来自外部空间
16. cut／tear…into pieces 把…切／撕成碎片
cut/tear ... into halves 把...切/撕成两半
17. do research (in/into...) 搞研究
18. go wrong 出错；出故障；走错道 do a little wrong
19. in the end 最后；终于 at the end of在…末尾／尽头
by the end of 到…末为止
19. meat-eating dinosaurs 食肉恐龙
20. owe sth to sb. = owe sb sth 把…归功于；感谢；欠（债）
WORD STUDY & GRAMMAR
21. can’t help doing sth 情不自禁， 忍不住做某事
can’t help do sth 不能帮忙做某事
22. pass the exam 考试及格 fail (in) the exam 考试不及格
NOT ONE LESS
23. a thirteen-year-old girl 十三岁小姑娘
a girl of thirteen years old; a girl of thirteen years of age;
a girl aged thirteen
24. stay/be away for a month 离开一个月
25. take one’s place; take the place of 代替
26. lock …up 把…锁起来
27. run after 追赶； 追求； 追捕 be after
28. escape (from)... 从...逃离
escape from / flee (from) /run away from a country
escape doing sth ；
escape being caught 没有被抓住
catch sb doing sth; be caught doing sth
29. run away from school 逃学 skip classes
30. determine to do sth；make up one’s mind；decide
be determined to do sth 决意/ 决心做某事
31. go to town 进城 in town 在城里
go to the country in the country
32. on the air 正在广播; 播送 =be broadcast
go on the air 开始广播 go off the air 停止广播
in the air在空中; (消息等)在传播, 悬而未决的
by air = by plane
33. live adj 活的（动物）； 现场直播的； adv. 以实况的
living adj 活着的； 有生命的；现行的（前置定语；表语）
alive adj 活着的， （ 后置定语； 表语）
a living language 现行的语言
the greatest living poet 当代最伟大的诗人
a live fish 活鱼
the live gala on New Year’s Eve 直播的新年除夕晚会
the only man alive 唯一还活着的人
34. all the other pupils 所有其他学生
35. together with 和…一起
36. in one’s own words 用自己的话 in other words 换句话说
37. make comments on / make a comment on 对…发表评论
38. give one’s opinions about 对…发表意见
39. think highly/well of =speak highly of
40. encourage sb to do sth
WORKBOOK
39. lead to + n. 通往；导致 result in; cause sb to do sth
lead sb to do sth 导致某人作某事 lead to sb doing sth
lead sb (in) doing sth; 带领某人做
lead sb + 介词短语
40. make/earn a living 谋生
41. at a high /low price 以高/低价
42. make a decision 做出决定
43. accept one’s apology 接受某人的道歉
apologize to sb; make an apology to sb. 向某人道歉
44. break down 出故障； 坏了；分解 break up 拆散
45. at full / high speed 高速 at a speed of 100 miles per hour
speed up 加速 speed by 飞驰而过
46. the World Cup Final 世界杯决赛
47. think highly/well of 对…高度评价 speak highly of
48. observe / obey the law 遵守法律 break the law
49. give sb a second look 再看某人一眼
50. make a fool of sb 愚弄某人 = fool sb.
51. turn out 结果变成
52. depend on / rely on 依靠， 依赖
53. stand by sb 支持某人 support sb /take sb’s side
54. meet with 遇见
55. encourage sb to do sth 鼓励某人干某事
56. lead the life of a real princess 过上真正的公主生活
57. make one’s career 在事业上有所成就
58. be clear about 对…清楚
bine ….with…把…和…结合起来
pare…with…把…和…比较
compare...to... 把...比作...
compared to/with 与...相比
Compared to men, fewer women smoke in China.
Unit 6 必会习语
Warming up & Speaking
1. apologize to sb. for sth/doing sth 因…向…道歉
make an apology to sb. for sth/ doing sth
2. mean + n./doing sth 意思是；意味着
mean +n. /to do sth/ that-clause 打算；意欲；有…的意图
mean sb to do sth. 打算（使／让）某人作某事
He meant no harm to you. / He meant you no harm.
He means his son to become a doctor.
Table Manners At A Dinner Party
3. for the first time “第一次” (作状语)
the first time “第一次”(相当于连词引导时间状语从句)
This is the first time that…. “这是第…次作某事了” (从句中用完成时)
On that day the scientist took us to the lab for the first time.
The first time we met, she wore a pair of glasses.
This is the first time that I have been here.
4. make / leave / create a good impression （on sb）
留下好印象 impress on sb
5. be impressed by/with 对...留下印象
6. drink a toast 祝酒 drink to+n. 为...干杯
7. start with = begin with 以…开始
end up with 以…结束 end in failure
8. keep silent 保持沉默
9. for a moment(一会儿); in a moment（过一会儿）;
at the moment（此时）; after a moment（过了一会儿）
for the moment（暂时）; at any moment（随时）
10. at the table 在桌前 at table 在吃饭
in the hospital / in hospital
in the prison / in prison /go to the prison /go to prison
in the church / in church / go to the church / go to church
go to the school / go to school
11．will 作情态动词,表意愿,决心,可用于if条件句中
You’d better not drink too much if you drive home after
the party.
He will come to see you if he has time.
If you will turn down the TV. There is really too much noise.
If you will read the book, I can lend it to you.
11. all the time 一直
12. drink to sb’s health / drink to sb.
13. raise one’s glass 举杯
14. take a sip 呡一小口
15. change over time 经过一段时间
16. follow the fashion of the day 跟随时尚
17. lay the table 摆桌子
18. serve the dishes 上菜
serve the people 为人民服务
serve in the army 服役
This restaurant serves Chinese food. (供应)
LANGUAGE STUDY
19. mix…with 把…和…混合 be mixed with
20. extra information 额外信息
21. leave out 省略
22. wish you all the best = best wishes for you.
Workbook Exercises
23. look forward to +n./doing 盼望;期盼…
24. stare at 盯着看
25. pay the bill 买单；付帐单
May I have the bill, please
26. behave oneself 注意自己的言行举止 behavior
27. It is certain that… 肯定…
It is uncertain whether/when, etc….
Sb +be sure/certain to do sth 一定会做某事
Sb +be sure/certain about/of... 对...有把握
Sb +be sure/certain that... 相信...
Sb +be not sure/certain whether/what...
28. fairy tales 童话
29. belong to 属于 (不用被动、进行时)
30. direct the traffic 指挥交通
31. produce / make /generate electricity 发电
32. hang (hanged/hanged) oneself vt. 上吊；绞死
hang-hung-hung 悬挂；vi. & vt.
33. The Hope Project 希望工程
Good Manners in the World
municate with 与…交流
35. shake hands with sb 和…握手
36. look right into sb's eyes/face 直视着
37. blow one's nose 擤鼻涕
38. in public 在公共场所 make ...public ; the public
39. think…to be… 认为…是…think of...as
40. at home and abroad 在国内外
41. give sb. some advice on sth / doing sth/how to do sth
给某人提建议
take/follow sb's advice 听某人的劝告
42. lead sb to do sth 导致某人做某事 lead to sb doing sth
43. pay a visit to sb/a place 拜访,参观
call on sb / call at a place
drop in (on sb) / (at a place)
44. make jokes about 拿…开玩笑； 讲笑话
play a joke on sb ; have a joke about
have a joke with sb ; joke with sb 和...开玩笑
tell jokes 讲笑话
make fun of 取笑 laugh at 嘲笑；讥笑
Unit 7 必会词语
A CITY OF HEROES
1. cultural relics/sites 文化古迹
2. in one's opinion 以某人的意见
3. Where there is a river, there is a city.
4. on the bank of a river 在河岸／畔
5. during/in one's lifetime;
in all one's life;
throughout one's life 在某人的一生中
6. look like something out of a fairy tale
像是从童话种走出来的一样
7. in history 在历史上
8. under attack/fire 被攻击 (under=in the process of)
under arrest; under discussion; under construction;
under consideration; under control; under examination; under investigation; under observation; under repairs;
9. give in （to sb) 让步，屈服 give up 放弃
give out 发放； 发出（光；热；气等）；用尽
give off 散发（光；热；气） give away 抛弃；捐赠
give over 转交，移交=hand over
10. in ruins 废墟 bring…to ruin 使…变成废墟=ruin sth
come/go to ruin=fall into ruin 变成废墟
11. lie in pieces on the ground 成为碎片撒了一地
12. We will do everything/all/what we can to save our city.
13. It seems (to me) that…;
It seems as if …;
There seems to be…
S. + seems/seemed to...
14. bring…back to life 使…复苏， 使…苏醒
come back to life 复苏； 苏醒
15. with the help of ＝ with sb's help 在…的帮助下
16. including sth. / sth. included 包括…在内
区分：include 和contain
This album contains 30 maps, including three of China.
17. look out over the city 俯视这个城市
e true 实现 (realize one’s dream)
come easy/right/loose
19. Strong, proud and united, the people of St Petersburg are the modern heroes of Russia.
形容词做伴随性状语：
Cruso returned home, full of fear.
The policeman put down the telephone, satisfied with a smile on his face.
I went to bed, hungry.
LANGUAGE STUDY & GRAMMAR
19. over a period of 150 years 经过150 年
19. change one's mind 改变主意
20. in men's table tennis singles / doubles event
在男子乒乓球单打比赛中
21. pull down 推倒；拆
21. send up 发射 send for; send out;
22. set up 成立; 建立；found; put up; build
23. turn/change…into… 把…变成
24. keep the same look 保持原貌
25. so far = up till now 到目前为止
INTEGRATING SKILLS
26. make + 宾语＋宾语补足语 使的…
make + 宾语+ do sth =sb be made to do sth
+ n.
+ adj.
+ done
make one's voice heard ；
make oneself known/understood
WORKBOOK EXERCISES
27. provide / supply sth for sb = provide sb with sth. 给…提供
offer sb sth = offer sth to sb
28. be careful with 对…小心／认真
29. have much /little/nothing in common
有很多／几乎没有／没有共同之处
30. be made up of 由…组成 consist of
31. settle down 定居 settle a problem
32. keep in touch with 与…保持联系 keep track of
get in touch with 与…取得联系
be out of touch with 与…失去联系
lose touch with 与…失去联系
33. bring down／up the price 降价／提价 v.t
go down /up v.i
34. put up a notice 张贴布告
35. the State Council 国务院
THE RESCUE OF ABU SIMBEL
36. for several reasons 由于一些原因
37. all through the year ＝ all the year round 一年四季
throughout the year
38. rise by 63 meters 上升了63 米
by 表示“相差程度”
39. as a result /consequence of 由于…的结果
40. date from = date back to 追溯于； 始建于
This temple dates from the Song Dynasty.
The temple, dating back to the Song Dynasty, will be pull down.
41. in danger 处于危险中; out of danger 脱离危险
42. be carved in rock 被刻在岩石上
43. make a plan for 为…制订计划
44. stone by stone 一块石头一块石头地
one by one
45. in all = in total =altogether 总共
46. be marked with 被标上…记号
47. Three Gorges Dam 三峡大坝
48. The Temple of Heaven 天坛
Unit 8 必会习语
WARMING UP & SPEAKING
1. the Olympic Games 奥运会
2. stand for 代表；容忍；支持/拥护；为...候选人
区分：represent 和 stand for
3. the Olympic Torch Relay 奥运火炬接力
4. the host city 主办城市
5. be worth ＋ n. 值… sth.+ be worth doing …值得做
be worthy of + n.
be worthy of being done
be worthy to be done
It is worth while to do sth / doing sth
6. score 20 points 得20分 （v.）
a score of people 20人 two score of people 40人
three score and ten of people 70人
scores of people 许多人
注意：a dozen eggs 十二个鸡蛋 two dozen eggs
a dozen of these eggs 一打这种鸡蛋
dozens of eggs 许多鸡蛋
THE OLYMPIC GAMES
7. every four years 每四年；每隔三年
every fourth year 每第四年
every other year 每隔一年
every few years 每隔几年
8. take part in = join in = participate in 参加
attend 出席 join sb (in doing sth) 和某人一起做某事
9. compete in 参加（竞赛）
compete against/with 与…相对抗
compete for 为…而竞争
10. allow /permit/forbid sb to do sth 允许/禁止某人做某事
allow/permit/forbid doing sth 允许/禁止做某事
Nothing is permitted; everything is allowed.
一切都不（明文）准许；但也不（明文）禁止。
11. in modern times 在现代 in ancient times 在古代
12. do ／try one's best to do sth 尽力做某事
13. rank third/high/low 位居第三/排名高（低）
She ranks first in English study in our class.
people of all ranks 各个阶层的人
14. host the Olympic games 主办奥运会
15. light the torch 点燃火炬 (lit—lit; lighted—lighted)
He lit a candle and the lighted candle lit up the room.
16. in preparation for 为…做准备
prepare for 为…做准备
make preparations for 为...作准备
17. have a good / bad effect on …对…有好/坏影响=affect
have influence on=influence
LANGUAGE STUDY
18. tens of thousands of 成千上万
19. pay …( to sb) for sth 付钱给…买…
20. at the opening /closing (ceremony) of 在…开/闭幕式上
21. by hand 手工 with one’s hands
22. spend…on sth 在…花费（钱；时间）
spend….(in) doing sth 花 （钱；时间） 做某事
spend (time) +a place 在某地度过（一段时间）
23. more than ＝ not only 不仅
More than fifty people attended the conference.
He dressed more than simply. 他穿着极为朴素。
We were more than pleased to hear of her coming.
He is more than a teacher to me.
She more than smiled, but laughed. (岂止是微笑，简直是大笑)
He is more brave than wise. (有勇无谋)
more than不仅 no more than = only 仅仅
Yao Ming has more than just size; he also has great skill and speed and he is a team player. （不仅）
He has no more than handsome look; he is neither wise nor polite. （仅仅）
not more than = less than 不超过；至多
no more than = only 仅仅
There is no more than ten yuan in my pocket. (只有)
There is not more than ten yuan in my pocket. （不到）
He is no taller/no more careful than me. （并不比...更）
He is not taller/more careful than me. （不如）
24. live one's dream ＝try to realize one's dream 努力实现梦想
WORKBOOK EXERCISES
25. set /give a good example to sb 为…树立好榜样
copy / follow the example of 学习/效仿...的榜样
26. the International Olympic Committee 国际奥委会
27. the spirit of the Olympic Games 奥林匹克精神
28. care about 关心
29. take up 占去（空间）； 开始从事；拿起；
30. put on weight = gain weight 体重增加
lose weight 减肥
31. as follows 如下
FOR THE LOVE OF THE GAME
32. even if 即使
33. hear about/of 听说
hear from sb 收到某人来信
hear that... 听说
34. I wish +从句 （虚拟语气；时态倒退一步）
I wish I were twenty years younger.
I wish I could make as much money as Michael Jordan.
I wish I had seen my favuorite movie star the other day.
35．deal with 对付；应付；处理；涉及；做生意
How did you deal with the rubbish
What did you do with the rubbish
36. shoot the ball into the other team's goal 把球踢入对方球门
Unit 9 必会习语
SPEAKING
1.be used for 被用于… be used as 被用作…
2. It depends. 要看情况而定。
LIFE ON THE GO
3. live life on the go 过着忙碌的生活
4. on the go 忙忙碌碌的； 四处奔走
5. make it possible for sb to do sth 使得某人做某事成为可能
6. throughout the world 遍及世界
7. more than 不仅， 多于；
no more than 仅仅； 只不过
not more than 少于， 不足
8. add to 增添；增加 add…to… 给…增加…
add up 加起来 add up to 加起来总共是
9. remind sb of/about sth 提醒某人某事
remind sb to do sth 提醒某人做某事
remind sb of doing sth 提醒某人已做过某事
remind that...
10．have an appointment with sb. 和…有预约
keep /break one's appointment 守约／违约
make an appointment with sb. 和…约定
by appointment 按约定
11. obey /break the rules 遵守／违反规定
12. agree (not) to do sth
agree that sb can/will do sth
agree with; agree to; agree on
13. dare not do = don't dare to do 不敢作…(同need)
14. take sth/sb away from… 把….从….带／拿走
14. stay/keep in touch with sb.; /keep track of
be in touch with 与…保持联系
get in touch with 与…取得联系
lose touch with 与…失去联系
be out of touch with
15. call for help 求救
16. in case (of an emergency) 万一； 以免
in case +从句 万一
17. do whatever he wants to do 想干什么就干什么
whatever 和 no matter what 区分
LANGUAGE STUDY
18. according to 根据
19. the negative/positive effect of ….的负面/正面影响
INTEGRATING SKILLS
20. take over 接管
21. (in) the way that/in which… …的方法
The few surviving human beings are being used (in) the way (that) we use machines today.
22. break down 出故障
23. dream of/ about 梦见；梦想
24. fail to do sth; fail in doing sth 没能做到…
succeed in doing sth 成功的做某事
be successful in doing sth
25. force sb to do sth 强迫某人做某事 oblige sb to do sth
by force 靠武力
e up with 想到； 提出
27. take steps /measures/action to do sth 采取措施
28. look up the words in the dictionary 在字典上查单词
29. go for a job interview 去面试找工作
30. unite as one 团结一致
31. hand in one's homework 交作业
32. suffer a serious defeat 遭惨败
FUTURE TRAVEL：TELEPORTATION
33. be based on 以…为基础
34. take …apart 把…分解 =separate
put…together
35. on the way 在路上 on one’s way to 在去...的路上
in the way 妨碍；挡道 in a way 在某种程度上
by the way 顺便问一下 （in）this/that way 这样
in the same way 用同样的方法
in different ways 用不同的方法
in no way 决不；一点也不
the way to do/of doing sth 做...的方法
the way (that/in which)定语从句
make one’s way to 朝...走去
all the way 一路上；从头至尾
by way of 经由；通过...的方法
way of life 生活方式
36. so far 到目前为止
37. We are still a long way from being able to do sth.
=It will take us a long time to be able to do sth.
38. It is possible (for sb) to do sth
It is likely/possible/probable that...
Sb is likely to do sth.
39. The more we know, the more we can imagine.
越..., 就越....
The more you listen to English, the easier it will become.
The longer you live in this place, the less you will like it.
Unit 10 习语必会
WARMING UP & LISTENING & SPEAKING
1.no longer; no more
1. There be… left 有…剩下
2. hunt animals for food 为得到…而捕猎…
hunt for 搜寻
hunt animals 狩猎
3. know of/about 对…了解
4. in danger 处于危险中 out of danger 脱离危险
in danger of 面临...的危险
endanger vt. 使...濒危；危害
endangered animals 濒危动物 become endangered
5. die out 灭绝； 消失
die away ； die off; die of; die from; die down
be dying for 渴望；很想
6. It follows that… 由此得出…； 可见…
People get sick because of air pollution. It follows that we must do something about it.
人们生病是因为空气污染。可见我们必须采取行动了。
7. lead to 导致
8. take turns to do sth/ doing sth 轮流做某事
do sth in turn/by turns
9. act as 扮演 play a role of
ARE WE ENDANGERED
10. an environmental expert 一位环境专家
11. keep/stop/prevent sb from doing sth 阻止…做…
keep sb doing sth 使...一直做...
keep (on) doing sth 坚持做某事
protect...from/against 保护...免受...
12. we don't do as we say. 我们言行不一。
13. ( take sb ) on a tour of... （带某人）游览...
14. have a bright future 用有一个灿烂的未来
15. harm sb/ do harm to sb/ do sb harm/ be harmful to sb
伤害某人；对...有害=be bad for
do good to sb/do sb good/ be good for/
benefit sb./be of benefit to 对...有好处/益
16. take measures/steps/action 采取措施
17. be used to sth/ doing sth 习惯于…
18. adapt to (改变以)适应 adapt oneself to 使自己适应于
adjust to (调整以)适应
19. become endangered 频临危险
20. the original species 原有的物种 species (单复数相同)
21. first of all 首先 at first; above all
22. make a big difference 大改观；影响大
23.If we know more about what causes endangerment, we may be able to take measures before it is too late. 如果我们能更多地了解致使生物濒危的原因，就能及时采取补救措施。
They are thinking of buying the house before the prices go up. 他们正在考虑趁房价未涨时把房子买下来。
If you don’t like the present job, I suggest you look for another one before it is too late.
如果你不喜欢目前的工作，我建议你趁早另谋出路。
He hung up before I could say a word.
我还没说一句话，他就挂了电话。
LANGUAGE STUDY
24. devote oneself to sth/doing sth 致力于…
be devoted to sth/doing sth 投身于
a devoted friend / wife
25. at present 目前 at the present time
be present at 出席
26. explain sth to sb 向某人解释…=explain to sb sth
27. set…free 释放 =free
28. in the wild 处于野生状态
INTEGRATING SKILLS
29．be careful with 细心；认真
be careful of/about 注意；留意
30. throw away 扔掉；throw about 四处乱扔
31. care about 关心 care for 喜欢；
workbook
32. go on a tour to 去…观光／游览
33. a large amount of (money) 许多(钱)
34. (translate) word for word 逐字地
answer point for point 逐点答复
对比：one by one; little by little
35. up to （1）正在做；从事于（2）大约； 多达
（3）理应；视为...的职责
What’s he up to 他在干什么？ （常用作贬义）
I guess the fellow is up to no good.
我猜这个家伙要图谋不轨。
The little boy can count up to twenty.
这小孩能从一数到二十。
The students are allowed up to two hours to finish the test. 学生们有长达两小时的时间来完成试题。
It’s up to you to decide what to do next.
由你来决定我们下一步做什么。
The success of this project is up to us.
这个项目的成败取决于我们.
36. become extinct = die out
37. keep…as a pet 把…当宠物养
mon adj. 常见的； 共同的； 普遍的(侧重指共性；强调“非特殊性，非优秀性” 或 "不足为奇的"
usual adj 通常的；寻常的；惯常的 （多指”习惯性的，遵循常规的，一贯如此的" 强调时间角度。
ordinary 通常的；普通的， 也指普遍的，但不是因为大家所共有而普遍常见， 而是因为符合事物的正常法则及一般规律而十分普遍； 也可带贬义，指低于一般标准的事物或人。
popular 普及的；通俗的， 指为广大群众所接受或深受喜爱的
general 一般的；普通的； 指属于大部分人或大部分事物的属性， 因此是一般的，普通的，可能也包括了一些极少数的例外。
Unit 11 习语必会
WARMING UP & SPEAKING
1. a piece of music 一支曲子
2. Can you help me to decide what to buy
3. What do you have in mind 你有什么主意？
4. dance to (a song/music) 伴着（歌曲／音乐）跳舞
5. What can/do you suggest
suggest sth
suggest (sb) doing sth
suggest that...
suggest +虚拟语气 （建议） insist +虚拟 (坚决要求)
suggest + 陈述语气 （表示） insist +陈述 (坚决认为)
6. Have you considered doing... 你考虑过...吗？
consider...（as/to be）... 认为...是...
consider sb to have done sth 认为...做过某事
THE SOUND OF THE WORLD
5. a musical instrument 乐器
6. musical styles 音乐风格
in style 流行的 out of style 过时的
7. have much/nothing in common with
和…有许多/没有相同之处
8. along with 和…一起
9. a variety of 各种各样的 varieties of = various
LANGUAGE STUDY
10. pick out 挑出 choose; select
pick up; pick on; pick
11. The style is the man. 文如其人
12. the key to the classroom 教室的钥匙
the answer to the question 问题的答案
the solution to the problem 问题的解决办法
the entrance to the station 车站的入口
13. give/put on a performance 表演/上演节目
14. golden pen 金笔 gold necklace 金项链
15. a two-room house 一个两室的房子
a four-storey building = a building of four storeys/stories
16. make a record 录制唱片 set a record 创纪录
record a song 录一首歌
17. turn into 变成； 译成 turn...into; turn to
POP VERSUS ROCK
18. become more and more similar 变得越来越相似
19. make music one's career 把音乐当事业
20. on the other hand 另一方面
20. satisfy sb. 使得某人满意
be satisfied with 对…感到满意
be pleased with; be content with
satisfactory = satisfying; satisfaction
21. satisfy one’s inner desire 满足某人的内心欲望
21. make people feel easy 让人们感觉轻松／悠闲
22. forget about 忘记了
AMERICAN COUNTRY MUSIC
23. have a hit 风靡一时
24. over the past twenty years 经过了过去的20年
25.be common for 对...很普通的
25. think…to be…. 认为…是
26. turn to 转向； 求助于；翻到
turn writer 成为作家 turn 20 过了20岁
27. think well of （be well thought of）
=think highly of =speak highly of
= sing high praise for 对…评价很高
28. make fun of 取笑; 拿某人取乐
29. bring in 带来(收入); 引进(技术)
30. on their travels 在旅行时
31, in the open air 在户外
31. for free 免费
a free meal
He is free with his money.
All these books are given away (for) free/free of charge.
The old woman has never been free from pain.
You are free to do anything you like, within the law.
Unit 12 必会习语
Warming up & Speaking
1. match…with… 把….和….相配
2. action film 动作片
3. romantic comedy 浪漫喜剧
4. shootings and fights 枪战
5. at the art festival 在艺术节上／期间
HARRY POTTER
6. magical power 魔力
7. magic tricks 魔术技巧
8. welcome to + n. 欢迎到…. Welcome home!
give sb a warm welcome 热烈欢迎
9. a world of magic and wonders 充满魔力和神奇的世界
10. a series of 一系列的
11. seem like =look like 看起来像
12. treat sb to sth 请某人（吃…） treat sb badly 虐待
treat ...as/like...
13. in trouble 在困境中
get into trouble 陷入困境
ask for trouble 自找麻烦 make trouble 捣乱
put sb to trouble 给人添麻烦
take trouble to do sth 不辞辛苦的做某事
14. do the right thing 做得对
e across
1. be understood;
He spoke for a long time but his meaning did not come across.
2. make an impression;
She came across well/badly in interviews.
He came across as a sympathetic person.
3. meet or find sb/sth by chance = run into
I came across some old photos in a drawer.
16. fight against 与…作斗争／打架／打仗 fight n.
fight with; fight for
17. believe 和believe in
believe in 信仰 (真理；宗教；原则)
信任= trust in；trust；have trust in
信赖=rely on
I believe him, but I don’t believe in/trust (in) him.
我相信他所说的话，但我不信任他/相信他的人格/能力。
Do you believe in God
believe和trust
believe sb/what sb said 相信某人（所说的话）
believe ...to be... 认为...是...
believe...to have done 认为/相信...做过某事
believe that... 相信；认为
trust that...
I believe/trust that you will join us. (trust比believe语气强)
I believe him to be an honest man.
=I believe that he is an honest man.
I believe him to have passed the exam.
=I believe that he has passed the exam.
I can’t trust that boy out of my sight.
我一看不见那个孩子就不放心。
18. grow up to be... 长大后成为...
19. share the same goal 有着共同目标
20.be strong in heart and mind 意志坚强，头脑聪明
THE QUESTION
21. whisper sth to sb 小声／悄悄给某人说
whisper sth in one's ear 咬耳朵
in a whisper 小声地
22. as if 好像
23. not all = all not 并不都
not every = every...not 并非每个...都
not both=both not 并非两个都...
...not all of them were safe.=...all of them were not safe.
Not both of the students are good at English.
=Both of the students are not good at English.
完全否定：None of the rooms are safe.
Neither of the students is good at English.
24. if only 要是…就好了
If only my mother were here with me.
25. be about to do sth when… 正要…这时…
26. turn around 转身
27. walk/run up to; go/come up to 上前去
28. go past 从...的旁边过去
WORKBOOK EXERCISES
29. play a trick on sb. 给某人恶作剧
30. apologize to sb for sth 向某人道歉
make an apology to sb.
31.(1) 摆脱…的习惯
get out of the habit (of doing sth) ;
get rid of the habit of
break off the habit of
(2) 养成…的习惯
get/fall into the habit (of doing sth)
form the/a habit (of doing sth)
(3) 有…的习惯
have the/a habit of
be in the /a habit of
32. TV series 电视连续剧
33. primary school 小学 elementary school
34. Attention, please, I have an announcement to make.
请大家注意，我要宣布一个通知。
May I have your attention, please 请大家注意啦!
35. run after 追赶；追求；追捕
BOOK MAFIC
36. be similar to 与…相似 the same as 和...一样
37. in other words 换句话说 in one’s own words
38. just like us doing what we do 就像我们做我们的事
=just as we do what we do
e (back) to life 苏醒；复苏；恢复生机
bring sb (back) to life 使...苏醒；使...恢复生机
40. in a way 在某种程度上
41. lose oneself in = be lost in 沉浸于； 沉醉于
Lost in thought, he almost knocked into a tree.
42. be eager/anxious to do sth 迫切地/渴望要做某事
be eager for/about/after 渴望得到
be anxious about 为...担忧；焦虑
long for 渴望得到 be dying for
PAGE
4第二部分 题型专项
完形填空
☆一、考点聚焦
1、题型特点
（1）完形填空是一种测试学生的外语语言知识以及运用这种语言的综合能力的试题。
（2）通常从一篇词数250左右、难度略低于教材上课文的文章中设空格20个，用时约18分钟。
（3）考点层次从小到大分为四类：单词层次，词组层次，句子层次与语篇层次。
（4）选项中的干扰项设置与语法结构错误无关，重在文意的干扰。
2、试题要求
（1）巩固、扎实、熟练的英语语法知识和丰富的英语知识。
（2）文章阅读能力和技巧，特别是快速阅读理解能力，甚至是跳过一些词语的能力。
（3）扎实的英语词组、短语，惯用法等固定搭配的知识，词语意义和词法的辨析能力。特别是以动词为中心的词组。
（4）逻辑思维能力，特别是理解文章的整体内容、主题思想的能力和推理判断的能力。
（5）根据试题捕捉相关信息能力。
3、命题走向
（1）文章趋向长，词数250左右，多为夹叙夹议文章。
（2）短文内容逻辑性强，结构严谨，层次分明。
（3）文章语言符合高三学生的实际水平，一般采用故事体，尽量避免选用专业性太强的文章或论说文体。
（4）意义选择填空为主，语法选择填空为辅。
（5）逐步过渡到选最佳答案。以单词填空为主，词组和短语填空为辅。
二、应试技巧点拨
（1）通读全文，掌握主题思想和文章结构。
（2）依次对各测试部分进行分析，观察判断所需内容。
（3）利用掌握的知识判断选择。
（4）根据文章上下文内容进行推理。
（5）寻找信息词，运用固定搭配和比较判断法。
（6）先易后难，利用已选出的正确答案推测未知答案。
（7）复读全文，验证答案。
三、精典范例
例1（NMET 2001）
He has been called the “missing link .” Half-man, half-beast. He is supposed to live in the highest mountain in the world-Mount Everest.
He is known as the Abominable Snowman. The ___1__ of the Snowman has been around for ___2 __. Climbers in the 1920s reported finding marks like those of human feet high up on the side of Mound Everest. The native people said they___3___this creature and called it the “Yeti,”and they said that they had___5__caught Yetis on two occasions ___4 __none has ever been produced an evidence（证据）。
Over the years, the story of the Yetis has___6___.In 1951, Eric Shipton took photographs of a set of tracks in the snow of Everest. Shipton believed that they were not ____7___the tracks of a monkey or bear and ____8___that the Abominable Snowman might really____9___.
Further efforts have been made to find out about Yetis. But the only things people have ever found were ___10_ _footprints. Most believe the footprints are nothing more than ___11___animal tracks, which had been made ___12___
as the melted（融化）and refroze in the snow. ____13___,in 1964, a Russian scientist said that the Abominable Snowman was ____14___and was a remaining link with the prehistoric humans. But, _15 __,no evidence has ever ___16___been produced.
These days, only a few people continue to take the story of the Abominable Snowman ____17____. But if they ever ____18____catching one, they may face a real _____19____: Would they put it in a___ 20____or give it a room in a hotel
( )1. A.event B.story C.adventure D.description
( )2. A.centuries B.too long C.some time D.many years
( )3. A.heard from B.cared for C.knew of D.read about
( )4. A.even B.hardly C.certainly D.probably
( )5. A.as B.though C.when D.until
( )6. A.developed B.changed C.occurred D.continued
( )7. A.entirely B.naturally C.clearly D.simply
( )8. A.found B.declared C.felt D.doubled
( )9. A.exist B.escape C.disappear D.return
( )10.A.clearer B.more C.possible D.rare
( )11.A.huge B.recent C.ordinary D.frightening
( )12.A.strange B.large C.deep D.rough
( )13.A.In the end B.Therefore C.After all D.However
( )14.A.imagined B.real C.special D.familiar
( )15.A.so B.besides C.again D.instead
( )16.A.rightiy B.actually C.normally D.particularly
( )17.A.lightly B.jokingly C.seriously D.properly
( )18.A.succeed in B.insist on C.depend on D.join in
( )19.A.decision B.situation C.subject D.problem
( )20.A.zoo B.mountain C.museum D.laboratory
解析：本文是一篇以介绍一种“半人半兽”的生物“Yeti”为主要内容的说明文；主要介绍了其特征、居住地以及关于它的传说故事。解题时，应先略读文章，了解大意；再细读文章，依次解题；最后通读全文，检查答案的准确性。
本题考查对文章的理解和词汇的意义，兼考惯用搭配、常识和语法。题1、2、10、11、12、14、偏20重于考查对文章内容的理解；题38、41、8、9、18、19考查词汇（包括词组、动词、名词）的辨析；题4、7、15、16、17要求根据文章内容判断适当的副词；题4、13考查连词。
1.B。后文叙述的是关于“Yeti”的传说故事，故选“story”。
2.D。从1920年开始被发现，至今应有“许多年了”。
3.C。当地人称这种生物为“Yeti”，肯定是“知道”它以及关于它的事。
4.A。“抓住”比“知道”更进一步，用“even”表示强调程度的加深。
5.B。“曾经抓到”与“没有证据”之间为转折关系，即：“虽然……但是……”。
6.D。第二段讲述了关于“Yeti”的一个传说故事，后文中将有新的介绍。故可知“故事”在“继续”。
7.D。“Shipton”相信这些“脚印”不简简单单为“猴子”或“熊”的脚印，故选“simply”。
8.C。“felt”与“believed”并列。
9.A。“Shipton”感觉这种动物可能真的存在。
10.B。人们发现的仅仅是“更多”的脚印。
11.C。许我人相信这些脚印只不过是那些普通动物（比如猴子或熊）留下的。
12.B。“普通的脚印”看起来不“普通”，是因为其在雪里融化而变“大”了。
13.D。前文介绍了一些人脚印的判断，而后文是一位俄国科学家的新发现。故判断出两部分之间应用“however”转折。
14.B。“real”意为“真的”、“存在的”。
15.C。前面提到过，当地人的发现和传说没有证据可依，这一次“又”是如此。
16.B。没有证据被实际记载。
17.C。“take … seriously”把……当回事（严肃认真对待）。
18.A。“Succeed in doing”成功地做成某事。
19.D。“face a problem”面临问题。
20.A。前文提到这种生物“半人半兽”，那么如果人们真的抓住一个，将面临的问题是：把它放到动物园（当它是动物？）还是在旅馆里给它一个房间（当它是人？）
例2 (2004年全国卷I)
It was the night before the composition was due. As I looked a the list of topics(题目)，“The Art of Eating Spaghetti（意大利面条）”caught my eye. The word“spaghetti”brought back the 36 of an evening at Uncle Alien’s in Belleville 37 all of us were seated around the table and Aunt Pat 38 spaghetti for supper, Spaghetti was an exotic（外来的）treat in 39 days. Never had I eaten spaghetti, and 40 of the grown-ups had enough experience to be 41 it. What laughing 42 we had about the 43 respectable method for moving spaghetti from plate to mouth. 44 , I wanted to write about that, but I wanted to 45 it down simply for my own 46 , not for Mr . Fleagle, my composition teacher. 47 ,I would write something else.
When I finished it the night was half gone and there was no 48 left to write a proper composition for Mr . Fleagle. There was no choice next morning but to 49 my work. Two days passed before Mr . Fleagle returned the 50 papers. He said,“Now, class, I want to read you a composition, The Art of Eating Spaghetti.”
My words! He was reading my words out 51 to the whole class, 52 laughed, then the whole class was laughing with open-hearted enjoyment. I did my best not to show 53 , but what I was feeling was pure happiness, 54 my words had the power to make people 55 .
( )1.A.memory B.thought C.knowledge D.experience
( )2.A.when B.where C.since D.after
( )3.A.cooked B.served C.got D.made
( )4.A.their B.past C.last D.those
( )5.A.none B.one C.some D.neither
( )6.A.careful about B.good at C.fond of D.interested in
( )7.A.speeches B.lessons C.sayings D.arguments
( )8.A.nearly B.naturally C.officially D.socially
( )9.A.Especially B.Probably C.Suddenly D.Fortunately
( )10.A.settle B.put C.bite D.let
( )11.A.work B.story C.luck D.joy
( )12.A.However B.Therefore C.As for him D.Except for that
( )13.A.time B.excuse C.way D.idea
( )14.A.give up B.continue C.hand in D.delay
( )15.A.written B.graded C.collected D.calmly
( )16.A.loud B.fast C.publicly D.calmly
( )17.A.People B.Nobody C.Somebody D.I
( )18.A.shock B.wonder C.worry D.pleasure
( )19.A.if B.for C.while D.although
( )20.A.excited B.satisfied C.think D.laugh
解析：全文讲作者一次有趣的吃意大利面条的经历，偏巧老师让写作文，他便写了一篇文章，原想自己留着，另写篇上交。由于时间不够，他只好将原本想留给自己的文章上交了，没想到作文极为成功。
1.A。“Spaghetti”这个词使他想起了以前吃面条的事，所以用memory .
2.A。when引导定语从句，修饰前面的evening,意为“当时”。
3.B。那天晚上作者和其他一些亲属坐在桌边吃Aunt Pat所做的面条，此时的面条不是在加工厂制做当中，不用made，不是刚买到，不用got，也不是在厨房里煮制过程中，不用cooked,而是端到餐桌上了，故用served。serve除作“服务”解以外，还有“端上（饭菜）”之意。
4.D。“在那个时候”或“在那些日子”用in those days。
5.A。
6.B。作者从未吃过意大利面条，而在座的成年人也都不擅长/没吃过，所以才有下文有关怎样吃意大利面条才得体的令人发笑的争论。
7.D。上句提到没有吃意大利面条的经验，因而大家才会争论怎样吃。所以填arguments。
8.D。吃东西的方式和举止要得体，要符合一定的社会文化，所以填socially。
9.C。文章开头提到spaghetti一词使作者想起过去的经历，由这经历突然想到了作文题，他要写这一文题。填suddenly表思绪的突然过渡。
10.B。
11.D。“把……写下来/记下来”用“put sth.down”。写下这一经历自己欣赏和享用，故用“joy”。
12.C。上文说自己要写吃意大利面条的经历，写下来自己留着享用，不给作文老师。作文是要交的，那么就写点别的给他吧。“As for him”可译为“至于他吗”
13.A。写完那篇文章，到了半夜了（自己还要睡觉），也就没有时间写准备上交的作文了。
14.C。别无选择，只好“上交”（原本打算留给自己的）作品。“hand in”是“上交”的意思。上交了但作品还是自己的，故不算放弃，不选A。B和D离题较远。
15.B。老师把作文收上去，过了两天发下来，那么这两天老师把作文批改，给分（或定个等级），作文也就是“被给过等级”的作文了。
16.A。老师极为欣赏作者的作文，所以把它朗读给全班，故选A。C项有干扰性，但“publicly”与“to the whole class”重复，不可选。
17.C。因故事有趣，有人先笑了，接着全班都开怀大笑。“then”是“接着、然后”的意思。先有人笑，然后是全都笑，不能是“无人笑，接着全都笑”，过于突兀，排除B。由于作者早已知道故事情节，未必先笑，排除D, People一词太空泛，范围过大，不可选。
18.D。自己的作文得到老师和同学们的欣赏，自然高兴，但不能显露自己的得意，所以填pleasure。
19.B。虽尽量不显示自己的得意，但心中还是充满了快乐，因为自己的作品能使人开怀一笑。所以填for，是表原因的并列连词。
20.D。从全文可知，使人发出笑声，而不是使人兴奋/满意/思考。排除其他选项。
*5*高三词组
1. set down　记下；写下
2. in the first place　首先；第一；原先
3. burst into sth.　突然而猛烈地发出或产生某事物
4. centre on/upon　将某人（某事物）当作中心或重点
5. concentrate on　专心致志于
6. Tour de France　环法自行车赛
7. keep track of　记录；掌握……的线索；保持对……的联系
8. stand out　突出；出色
9. be diagnosed with...　被确诊患有……（疾病）
10. in a row　连续，一连串
11. lead sb.to do sth.　致使某人做某事
12. apply for　提出申请（或要求等）
13. make for　走向；向……前进；有利于，有助于；倾向于
14. get a better understanding of...　更充分地理解……
15. head down to...　向……进发，动身
16. hang ten　（冲浪运动中）作十趾吊
17. in the name of　以……的名义；代表
18. push on（with sth.）毅然继续（做某事）
19. run out of　耗尽；用光
20. apart from...　除……外（尚有）
21. set sail（to/from/for...） 起航
22. compete for　为……而竞争
23. in search of　寻找
24. give birth to　生；产生
25. as long as　（表示条件）只要……
26. at the height of　在……顶点；在（事业等）的高峰
27. for once and always　一劳永逸地
28. be made up of　由……构成；组成
29. as a consequence（of ）作为（……的）结果
30. the Commonwealth of Australia　澳大利亚联邦
31. go walkabout到灌木丛中闲逛
32. break out（指激烈事件）突然发生
33. feed...on给（人或动物）食物；喂养；饲养
34. round up使集合在一起
35. stand for代表，代替；象征，意味着
36. have a strong/great influence on...对……有重大影响
37. benefit from...从……受益
38. differ from...和……不同
39. be fond of喜欢
40. have fun with开玩笑
41. set foot on踏上
42. give birth to生；产生
43. in area在面积上
44. keep out（使）在外
45. all the year round终年
46. have access to接近（或进入）的方法（或权利、机会等）
47. on a large scale大规模地；大范围地
48. pass away去世；逝世
49. belong to属于
50. base...on...把……基于……
51. at first sight　乍一看（之下）
52. be born into　出身于
53. have an appetite for　爱好……
54. look out for　照料，照看……
55. put together　把……放在一起；把……加在一起
56. work out　做出；设计出；制订出；算出
57. make contributions to　对……作出贡献
58. adapt to　适应
59. take into consideration　考虑到，顾及
60. in charge（of）　处于控制或支配地位；负责
61. hand in hand　手拉手；密切关联的
62. get across　传播；为人理解
63. appeal to　有吸引力；呼吁；上诉
64. keep an eye out for sb./sth.　留心或注意某人或某物
65. make sense　有意义；有道理；讲得通
66. apply... to...　运用；应用
67. lose heart　泄气；灰心
68. take it easy　别紧张；放松点
69. keep up　维持；保持；使某事物处于高水平
mon sense　常识；情理
71. leave behind　忘带；留下
72. lose one’s way　迷路
e to an end　结束；中止
74. live through sth.　经历某事物而幸存
75. tie up　系；拴；捆
76. at stake　在危险中
77. go for　为……去努力获取
78. lose weight　减肥
79. be to blame　该受责备；应负责
80. be upset about...　（对……感到）不安的；不快的；心烦意乱的
81. associate... with...　使发生联系；使联合
82. protect... from...　保护……免于……
83. be promoted with　（用……手段来）宣传，推销
84. create/form a positive image of　塑造/形成一个正面的形象
85. point out　指出
86. think twice　重新考虑
87. believe in　相信；信仰
88. set off for...　出发，动身到……
89. be accustomed to　习惯于……
90. on all fours　匍匐，趴着
91. come to a decision　决定下来
92. come to an agreement　达成一致；达成协议
e to a conclusion　告终；下结论
94. take up　拿起；着手处理；开始（从事于）
95. care for　喜爱；照顾
96. leave alone　不管；随……去
97. in want of　需要
98. close up　（尤指暂时）关闭；使靠近
99. care about　介意……，在乎，关心
100. safety standards　安全标准
101. working conditions　工作条件
102. social conscience　社会道德
103. .a poor excuse　一个差劲的借口
104. bring in　赚入……；获利
105. be badly-off　生活穷困
106. fall asleep　入睡
107. have no eye for　不关心；不在意
108. far from　远离；一点也不
ment on　评论，批评，解释
110. in face of　面对……，在……面前，不顾……
111. in favor of　支持……，赞同……；为有利于……
112. in praise of　称赞……
113. in hope of　抱着……的希望
114. in charge of　掌管，负责
115. in memory of　为了纪念；为追悼……
116. in honor of　为了纪念
117. in search of　搜寻
118. in need of　需要
119. turn down　拒绝
120. as follows　如下
121. end up in　以……告终，以……为结局
122. one by one　一个接一个地；逐个地
123. date back to　（时间）追溯到
124. get it wrong　误解
125. on the contrary　相反的是；反而
126. toast to　干杯；祝酒
127. make sense of　弄懂……的意思
128. in other words　换句话说；换言之
129. take risks　冒险
130. experiment with　进行试验；进行实验
131. piles of　一大堆；一大批；一大团
132. fall behind　落后于
e across　（偶然）遇见
134. make progress　取得进步
135. adjust...to...　调整……；调解……
136. as a consequence　因此
137. regardless of　不顾，不管，不拘
138. take place　发生
139. thanks to　多亏了，由于
140. wake up　醒来；叫醒
141. stay up　挺住；坚持不睡觉
142. broaden one’s horizons　开阔眼界
143. in the beginning　开始；起初
144. lay off　解雇；不理会；使下岗
145. make matters worse　使情况更困难或更危险
146. get rid of　摆脱
147. make ends meet　使收支相抵；量入为出
148. be devoted to　献身……的；专心于……的
149. play a role in　在……中起作用
150. medical treatment　医疗
151. reach a decision　决定下来；下结论
152. aim at　瞄准；针对；目的在于
153. take measures to ...　采取措施来（做）……
154. make a living　谋生
155. depend on　依靠；取决于
156. live on　以……为主食；靠……生活
157. prevent... from ...　阻止，阻挡；制止；妨碍
158. provide ... for ...　为……提供……
159. meet the needs of　满足……的需要
160. be burdened with ...　使负重担
161. put pressure on ...　给……施压，增添压力
162. state-owned companies　国有企业
163. lose weight　减肥
164. ready-made clothes　成衣
165. make fun of　取笑某人
166. attend to　处理；照顾；关照
167. take pride in　对……感到自豪
168. do up　打扮；梳妆
169. let down　不支持；使失望
170. at length　最后；终于；详细地
171. at a time　一次
a) go far　（人）大有前途；成功
172. come into being　形成
173. as to　关于
174. be accused of　被控诉，控告；被指责，谴责
175. et free　使获得自由；释放
176. refer to　参考；涉及；谈到；指的是
177. turn to　转向，变成；求助于
178. adapt to　使适应，使适和
179. get accustomed to　变得习惯于
180. for a moment　片刻；暂时
181. live through　度过；经受住
182. break out in tears　突然大哭起来
183. cut off　切掉；割掉；剪下；切断；隔绝
184. tear at　撕，扯……
185. lay off　解雇；不理会；使下岗
186. make matters worse　使情况更困难或更危险
187. get rid of　摆脱
188. make ends meet　使收支相抵；量入为出
189. be devoted to　献身……的；专心于……的
190. play a role in　在……中起作用
191. medical treatment　医疗
192. reach a decision　决定下来；下结论
193. aim at　瞄准；针对；目的在于
194. take measures to ...　采取措施来（做）……
195. make a living　谋生
196. depend on　依靠；取决于
197. live on　以……为主食；靠……生活
198. prevent... from ...　阻止，阻挡；制止；妨碍
199. provide ... for ...　为……提供……
200. meet the needs of　满足……的需要
201. be burdened with ...　使负重担
202. put pressure on ...　给……施压，增添压力
203. state-owned companies　国有企业
204. lose weight　减肥
205. ready-made clothes　成衣
206. make fun of　取笑某人
207. attend to　处理；照顾；关照
208. take pride in　对……感到自豪
209. do up　打扮；梳妆
210. let down　不支持；使失望
211. at length　最后；终于；详细地
212. at a time　一次
213. go far　（人）大有前途；成功
e into being　形成
a) as to　关于
b) be accused of　被控诉，控告；被指责，谴责
c) set free　使获得自由；释放
d) refer to　参考；涉及；谈到；指的是
e) turn to　转向，变成；求助于
f) adapt to　使适应，使适和
g) get accustomed to　变得习惯于
h) for a moment　片刻；暂时
i) live through　度过；经受住
j) break out in tears　突然大哭起来
k) cut off　切掉；割掉；剪下；切断；隔绝
l) tear at　撕，扯……
m) stick with继续支持；保持联系
n) through thick and thin 不顾艰难
o) pull out of从……中退出
p) cater to满足某种需要或要求
q) for the sake of由于；为了……的利益
r) in reality事实上；实际上
s) keep an eye on 照料；照管
t) take sth.into account考虑；体谅
u) as a whole 总的说来；作为整体
v) once again再一次
w) live up to依照……行事；做到；不辜负（期望）
x) accept...as... 认为……
y) on one’s own独自，靠自己，独立
z) the majority of大多数；大部分
aa) .a pie chart饼状图
ab) .a bar chart柱状图
ac) .match...to... 使……（和……）调和，相配
ad) be suspected of 被猜疑，被怀疑
ae) .take measures to ...采取措施（做……）
af) .be familiar with 对……熟悉
ag) .be made up of构成；组成
ah) .count...as... 把……认为……
ai) on the other hand 另一方面
aj) .attach to 伴随……
ak) .be aware of 察觉到，感觉到，获悉
al) be suitable for适合做……
am) .guard...against... 守护……（免于……），保护
an) make the best use of充分利用
ao) on the surface 表面上的，外表上
ap) as a matter of fact 实际上
215. be satisfied with 对……满意
216. lose face 失面子
217. by means of以……，借着……
218. put ... to use使用，用，利用
219. in demand有需要的；吃香的
220. so as to为了，目的是
221. sit for参加（考试）
222. concentrate on 集中；专心；专注
223. to begin with首先；第一；起初
224. drop out （of）（从活动、竞赛等中）退出；辍学
225. result in产生某种作用或结果
226. be skeptical of怀疑
227. take in把（某人）带进；领入
228. rely on依赖；依靠
229. as far as（远）至（某处）；到……程度
230. lifelong learning 终身学习
231. work out解决；计算出；详细拟订
232. have a lot in common有很多共同之处
233. be suited for适合做……，对……适宜
234. take place发生，产生；进行，举行
235. turn down拒绝，不接受
236. be set in以……为背景
237. pass on传递
238. go wrong不对头，出毛病；失败
239. except for除……之外；若无
240. be in love with爱上某人
241. learn about听到，获悉
242. take one’s revenge on sb.for sth.因某事向某人报仇
243. break into pieces（使）成为碎片
244. keep...out of使……置身于外
245. at the time of在……的时候
246. turn out 结果（是），证明（是），原来（是）
247. as for关于，至于
248. at times有时，不时
249. get straight to the point直奔主题
250. varieties of各种各样的
251. to one’s surprise让某人吃惊的是
252. as soon as一……就……
253. one after another一个接一个地，连续不断地
e to light显露出来，暴露
255. over and over again
256. tell...apart一再；多次；反复
257. get hold of抓住；拿住；握住
258. make a beeline for径直朝……走去
259. as a matter of fact事实上；说真的；实际上
260. keep in touch保持联系
261. feast on大吃大喝；享受美食
262. make a distinction between...and...区分；区别
263. make sense有意义；有道理；讲得通
264. apply for申请；请求
265. straight away立刻地；毫不犹豫地
266. fit in（with） 与……相适应；与……相协调
267. hold back退缩；踌躇
268. take a while用一些（一段）时间
269. approve of赞同；赞许
270. have sth.in common with sb.和某人有共同之处
271. take part in参与；参加
272. make contributions to为……作出贡献
273. Secretary General of the United Nations联合国秘书长
274. make a difference有关系；有影响；有意义
275. be eager to do sth.渴望做……
276. open up打开，张开；开发；开辟；揭露；展现
277. at times有时，不时
278. as a consequence结果；后果
279. be due to 应归于
280. become involved in使卷入，使陷入；拖累
281. make the adjustment to适应于
282. take off脱下；（飞机）起飞
283. put on穿上，戴上
284. be popular with受（某人）欢迎
285. get in touch with和……取得联系
286. dream of梦想；向往
287. make use of利用
288. set up树立；开办；设立；创立；建立
289. as well as也，又
e true实现，达到
291. be up to胜任，适于
PAGE
3语法复习专题（5）
Unit5 介词和连词
一、考点聚焦
1、介词的分类与语法功能
（1）介词是虚词，不能单独作句子成分，必须与名词、代词（或相当于名词的其他词类、短语或从句等）构成介词短语，在句中充当一个成分。介词分为：简单介词，如at、in、for等；合成介词，如within、inside、onto、througout等；短语介词，如according to、out of、because of、by means of、in spite of、instead of等。双重介词，如from behind / above / under、until after等。分词介词，如considering、including、judging(from / by) 等。
常见的介词宾语：名词、代词、动名词、从句、不定式等。如：
①It is going to rain this afternoon according to the weather
forecast.
②He quarrelled with her yesterday.
③He succeeded in passing the final exam.
④I’m still thinking of how I can fulfil the task ahead of time.
⑤The professor will give us a talk on how to study English well.
（2）介词短语在句中可作表语、定语、状语和宾补等。如：
①This machine is in good condition.(表语)
②Where is the key to my bike (定语)
③Nothing in the world could live without air or water.(状语)
④She always thinks herself above others.（宾补）
2、介词搭配
（1）“动词+介词”搭配：注意特定搭配与同一介词与多个动词搭配意义不同的情况。
①rob sb. of sth. / clear the road of snow(“夺去、除去”意
义的动词与of 连用)
②supply us with food / fill the glass with wine（“供给”意义的动词与with连用）
③make a desk of wood / make bread from flour / make the material into a coat（“制作、制造”意义与of、from、into连用）
④介词 + the + 部位与动词的关系（=动词 + sb.’s + 部位，可换用）
strike him on the head(“击，拍，碰，摸”意义与on连用)
catch him by the arm(“抓，拉，拿，扯”意义与by连用)
hit the boy in the face（“肚，胸，眼，脸”等人体前部与in连用）
⑤prevent(stop, keep)sb. from doing sth.(“阻止，禁止”意义与from连用)
⑥persuade(advise, warn)sb. into doing sth.（“说服，建议”意义与into连用）
⑦buy sb. for sth.(leave、get、win、gain、lose等“得失”意义与for连用)
⑧tell sth.to sb.(show、teach、sing、write、read等“告知”意义与to连用)
⑨give sth. to sb.（give、allow、promise、pass、hand等“授予”意义与to连用）
注意：⑦⑧⑨可换成buy sb.sth.双宾结构。
⑩say to sb.(suggest、explain、apologize、murmur、whisper与“对象”连用必须用to)不可说suggest sb.sth.。
同一动词与不同介词搭配意义不同。
for（寻找） to sth. of(听说) on(拜访)
look to (眺望) agree with sb. hear call for(需要)
at（看） on sth. from(收到信) in(请)
同一介词与不同动词搭配，意义各异。
reply to the letter回信，sing(dance)to the music和……唱（跳），amount to 达到，加起来有……，devote to把……贡献给，drink to为……干杯，object to反对，look forward to 渴望，come to苏醒，belong to属于，search for搜……，ask … for … 寻找，use … for用作，leave for前往，take … for误以为，call of倡导，wait for等待，care for喜欢，make up for弥补损失，turn to求助（救）于，help oneself to随意，agree to同意，compare … to把……比作，send for派人去请（拿）……，sail for驶向，航向，set out for动身去，go in for爱好……。
（2）常见“形容词 + 介词”搭配。
of担心…… about / at sth.
afraid angry
for 替……而担心 with sb.
for sth.渴望…… different from与……不同
amxious
about sth. / sb担心…… different to … 不关心……
of讨厌 with sb.
tired strict
from/ with因……疲倦 in sth.要求严格
at擅长 with sb.受……欢迎
good for对……有益 popular in some place流行在……
of sb. to do so友好 for … 因……而流行
with + 名词或what从句
pleased helpful to对……有帮助
at + 抽象名词（听 / 看到……而高兴）
to sb.为人所知
known for因……而出名 be familiar with熟悉
as作为……出名 be familiar to为……熟知（悉）
sorry for … 替……后悔 disappointed at sth.失望
from缺席
rich in富有…… absent
in离开此地去了……
worthy of值得的，glad about sth. for sb.为某人某事高兴，far from离……远，grateful for sth. to sb.为某事感激某人，free from没有……（免除……），proud of(take pride in)自豪，satisfied with (by)满意，sure of / about确信，fond of喜欢，fit for适合，busy with sth.(in doing sth.)忙着干某事，full of充满，ready for准备，similar to相似，wrong with不对；有毛病……
（3）“名词 + 介词”要注意习惯搭配和意义区分。
the absence of water缺水
the hope of success成功的希望
have a chance of (for) entering college上大学的机会
take pride in them为他们感到骄傲
the key to the question问题的答案
a medicine for cough治咳嗽的药
the ticket for tomorrow明天的票
in Beijing去了北京
his abesence
from Beijing不在北京
to study学习方法
the way
of studying maths学习教学的方法
3、核心介词用法归纳与辨析
（1）表示时间的介词in的用法如下。
表示在某一较长时间内，如世纪、年、月、季、周等一般用介词in，
如：in the 1990s, in the year, in January, in(the) winter / summer / fall / spring, in the first week of May。
还可以用时段名词组成固定短语或词组。如：in a while, in no time, in the daytime, in a short while, in time, in the morning (afternoon, evening)。但要注意：
①at night / at noon, in the day(在白天),in the night（大夜间）。
②in five days（weeks, months, years）中in意思是“在……以后”。
③in和during表一段时间内两词可互用。如：in the night, during the night, in the war, during the war。但略有区别：当接表示“活动”的抽象名词时多用during，接“活动”的动名词及短语时用in。如：
during the discussion in discussing the problem
during her stay in Hubei in playing basketball
during the course of in digging the tunnel
（2）在具体的某一天或某天上午、晚上、前夕，常用on。
on Sunday(s).on Tuesday morning
on Christmas Day(但at Chrismas),on Christmas Eve, on
Children’s Day
on March 8, on the morning (afternoon, evening)of Oct.1
early on the morning of Oct.1(区别：in the late / early morning of Oct.1)
on a rainy night, on warm winter days
(3)表示某一时刻或某一点时间用at,如小时、分钟等。
at breakfast(supper, lunch),at six
at noon (sunrise, sunset, midday, night, midnight, dawn)
at the age of 15, at the time of war,但in time of danger/ trouble。
注意：有些时间名词前不接介词。如：
next day、last Sunday、that morning、these years
one、each、any、every、some、all修饰时,一般不用介词,如some day
one day、yesterday / afternoon,the night before
（4）till、until、to的用法。
①till(until)与持续动词连用一般用于肯定句中，与短暂动词连用一般用在否定句中。如：
He waited for me till twelve o’clock.
He didn’t get up till(until) 10 a.m.(不可用to).
但注意：在句首出现或强调句型中一般不用till而用until。如：
Not until 9 a.m.did Mr.Smith come back to school.
②to表“终结”时常用和from连用，但要注意不与from连用时的意
义。如：from July to September, from six to(till)eight（从……到……为止），但from morning till night（从早到晚），不能用to。from … to常构成习惯搭配，不可换用其他介词。（A）表持久连续、传递、转移的含义。from time to time(不时，有时)，from day to day (天天),from hand to hand(不断传下去)，from place to place（处处，到处），from side to side(左右摇摆)，from door to door（家家户户），from house to house（挨家挨户），from shop to shop（一个商店接一个商店）。(B)表起始终止的全过程或程度加深、状态变化。from beginning to end(从头到尾，自始至终)（from the beginning to the end of…）;from hand to mouth(仅能糊口)，from bad to worse(越来越糟)，from head to foot(从头到脚),
from top to bottom（整个地，彻底地），from top to toe(全身)，from start to finish（自始至终，从头到尾）。（C）from one + 名词 + to another表示“依次”。如from one car to another（顺着车厢依次地）。（D）名词 + by + 同一单数名词，表示“一个一个地”，要与from … to短语区别开：one by one 一个一个地；little by little(bit)一点一点地；step by step 一步一步地，逐渐地（但by and by 不久以后）；sentence by sentence逐句地；day by day一天一天地；side by side(with…)(和……)并肩，一起；shoulder to shoulder肩并肩地，齐心协力；hand in hand 手拉手，紧紧地;face to face面对面。
（5）in、after、later
①in + 一段时间：表示说话时为起点一段时间之后，与一般将来时连用；但表示“在……之内”时，用于各种时态。
②一段时间 + later(later是副词)：表示某一具体时间或某一方面具体时间算起的一段时间后。
③after + 一段时间表示：“在……之后”，用于一般过去时；但时间为点时间时，只能用after,即after + 点时间，用于各种时态。
The doctor will be with us in six minutes.
She graduated in 1981,and eight years later she became the manager of the factory.
He received her letter after four weeks.
另外，in + 一段时间 + ’s + time 与 within + 一段时间的用法如下：
in a week’s time = in a week
They will arrive in three days’ time.(与将来时连用)
My brother’s birthday is in two weeks’ time.（作表语）
I’ll finish the book within two weeks.(within = in less than…用于各种时态，不超出，在……之内)
（6）地点介词at、on、in、to、across、through、over、under、below。
①at 在较小的场所，in在较大的场所，on在……的平面上。如at the
door、at the airport、at the station、at 55 Park Street、in China、in the north、in Asia、on the desk、on the wall等。
②on、at、in还可以表示两地相对位置。若A地属于B地，用in;A地位于B地的外面且有边缘衔接用on；无边缘的衔接有to。如：
Japan lies to the east of China.(范围之外)
Taiwan lies in the southeast of China.（范围之外）
Hunan province lies on the west of Hubei province.(毗邻)
The island lies off the coast of China.(相隔一定距离)
③地点介词的引申、比喻意义：in the sun在阳光下，in the dark(ness)在黑暗中，in the dark不知道，in freezing weather在严寒天气中，in the mud在泥中，in the earth在地下,in the desert在沙漠中,in a heavy rain 在大雨中，in the snow / wind在雪/风中,in public 当众，in trouble 在困境中，get into trouble陷入困境，out of trouble摆脱困难，beyond hope绝望。
④across在物体表面“穿过”；through则表示在三维空间内部“穿过”。如：
They walked across the playground.
I walked through the forest.
⑤over / under / above / below。
over、above译作“在……之上”；under、below译作“在……的下面”，其区别在于over、under表示一种直接的、垂直的上下关系；而above、below则表示一般的“高于”或“低于”，不一定是垂直“在上”或“在下”。如：
A little boat is now under the bridge.
There is a bridge over the river.
The sun sinks below the horizon(地平线)
The window is well above the tree.
⑥表示地点介词的静态性和动态性
He walked to the station（静态，表示方向和目的地）
He walked towards the station.(动态，只表示方向)
He is kind to (towards)us.（两者通用）
He is at the station.(静态，表示地点)
They arrived at the station.(动态，表示地点)
He swam away from the ship.(动态“离开”)
He stood away from the shop.(静态“远离”)
He fell onto the floor.(动态“到地面”)
The city is on the Changjiang River.(静态“平面”)
Go off the road.偏离了道路（动态“离去”）
Come along the river.沿着河过来（线）
across the fields 跨过田野……，over the desert跨越沙漠
across the river横跨这条河……，over the hill翻过这座山
be in the house(静态，在这里……)stay out of the car(静态，在……外)
go into the house(动态，进入)fly out of the country(动态，离开)
（7）表示方式、手段、工具的介词
①by the year/hour/day按年/小时/天。如He rent a house by the year(day,hour).(按by+the+单位名称)但to the pound按磅算，to the ton按吨计。
②表泛指的方式、手段
by post/mail邮寄，by telephone(radio),但on the phone/on the radio/on TV(电讯器材)，by electricity用电，by machinery用电器，by hard work,learn sth.by heart,through the satellite,through practice,through his own efforts,through experience,through the telescop
③交通工具类
by bus/train/car/taxi(road)
by bike/bicycle,on horse back/on foot
by plane/jet/spaceship,by air
by ship/boat/lifeboat,by sea/by water
另外：by means of 用……方法，by way of 经由，取道于，用……方法，with the help (permission)of sb./with sb.’s help (permis-
sion)。
④表方式、手段的其他用法
He beat the dog with a whip.(with+工具机器)
One smells with his nose.(with+人体器官，但by hand“手工，用手”)
He stood up with pride.(with+情绪、情感、态度的名词)
注意：使用语言、材料、文字等用in。如in English(ink,pencil)。另外如：in high (good,low)spirits,in anger,in joy,in comfort,in sorrow,in safety,in danger,in need,in debt,in love,in fun,in pain,in tears,in surprise,in good(poor)health,in good order,in flower,in a way,in a low voice,in silence,in(with)satisfaction,in a hurry,in(with)words,live/feed on food,kneel on one’s knee,take(catch)sb.by surprise(出其不意)
（8）表示“除……之外”的几组常用介绍比较。
①besides 除……以外，（还有）。作副词时意思是“而且，更何况”。
Well all went to the cinema besides Shaw.除了肖外，我们都去了电影院。
It was too late to see a film, and besides, I was tired.
②except除去，除……之外（不再有）。
We all went except John.我们都去了，约翰没有。
在否定句中，两词可以换用，如：
He has no other hats except / besides this one.
③except for除了……（对句子主题进行细节校正或附加说明）后接名词、代词或what从句，此时与except that + 句子意思相同。
He was very clever except for carelessness.
④except that … 除了……一点以外。
He has not changed except that he is wearing dark glasses.
⑤but与except
but和except在表示“除了……以外”时可以通用，但应注意以下三点：
①前面有不定人词、疑问代词在意义上对称时，多用but。
All but one are here.
Nobody but I likes making model ships.
②后接不定式短语为排除对象时，多用but。
He has nothing to do but wait.（前有do,后省to）
③but与一些固定结构连用。
have no choice but to do sth.只得做某事，can not but do sth.不得不,can not help but do sth.不得不……，but for … 如不是……
（9）between与among.
between通常指两者之间。也可以用于三者以上的两者之间。如：
Ann is between Tom and Bill.
Switzer land lies between France, Germany, Australia and Italy.
They soon finished the work between themselves.(共同，合作)
She was busy between cooking, washing, sewing and looking after the baby.(表示接连不断地，一个接一个地忙这忙那)
A horse can be seen between trees now.
among表示三者以上之间。如：
The story is said to have happened in a village among the hills.
He was happy to be among friends again.
We must agree among ourselves.(一起，共同)我们必须达成共识。
London is among the largest cities.( = one of与最高级连用)
（10）表原因的介词for、because of、due to。
He didn’t come to the meeting because of his illness.
The reason for his coming late is that he was ill.
He was praised for his bravery and courage.
The accident is due to your careless driving.
(11)不定式复合结构中的for、of。
这里所说的不定式复合结构形式指的是for 或of加上人或事，作动词不定式逻辑主语的结构。
①It is clever of you to answer it like that.
②It is quite hard for me to explain why.
注意：两句中的of和for的使用，表语形容词能够说明不定式逻辑主语的性质、特征与面貌时用of,如果说明不定式行为本身的性质、状态等则用for。
（12）兼作连词和副词的介词。
①after、since、till / still、before这些词既是介词，又是连词。
The children went home at once after school.
They went to bed after they had finished the job.
②in、on、along、down、up、after、before、along、beyond等介词可兼作副词。
He ran down the hill.（介词）
Can you lift that box down from the shelf for me (副词)
③有的介词可以兼作连词和副词。
All the students got to school before me.(before为介词)
We do want to buy something now before prices go up.(连词)
Haven’t I seen you before (before为副词)
（13）介词的省略。
①表示时间的介词on、at 、in的省略。在next、last、yesterday、tomorrow、each、one、any、every、all等词之前，可以省略，也可以不省略。如（at）last weekend、（on）that day等。
②介词for表示时间的省略要求。（A）以all开头的名词短语，for要省略。如：I stayed with her all he morning.（B）表示一段时间的短语之前，for可以省略，也可以不省略。如：I have been waiting hereI (for) more than three hours.（C）否定句中，表示时间的短语前的for不能省略。如：I haven’t seen you for thirty years.(D)时间状语在主句之前，for不能省略。如：For the whole morning,the old man kept reading.
③某些动词短语之后的介词可以省略。
Nothing can prevent me(from)doing the job.
She spent nearly two hours(in)translating it.
（14）某些名词与介词构成的固定搭配。
①要求接to的名词有：key、answer、visit、entrance、apology、introduction、road等。
②要求接in 的名词有：interest、satisfaction、expert等。
He is expert in teaching small children.
(15)几个常用的并列连词。
①both … and, either … or, neither … nor
both … and“双方都”，连接句子的两个主语时，其后谓语动词通常用使用复数形式。either … or与neither … nor注意采取“就近原则”。
②not only … but also, as well as
注意：两者强调对象不同，not only … but also强调的是but also之后部分，而as well as则强调其前面的部分。not only … but also采取“就近原则”，而as well as只是一个插入语，采取“就远原则”。如：
Mr.Smith, as well as his wife and children, has come to Nanjing for a visit.
not only … but also结构中的not only可用于句首，连接两个分句时，第一个从句主谓要倒装。
Not only is he clever ,but also he is hard working.
（16）几个常用的从属连词。
①when、while、as都表示“当……时候”，when引导的从句的动作与主句的动词可同时发生，也可先后发生；as、while引导的从句则强调主句和从句的动作同时发生。如：
When I go to the station, the train had already left.
He sang merrily as he was working.
②till、until均表示“到……时候止”，肯定句中的谓语必须是延续性动作。如：I worked till late at night.若主句谓语是终止性动词，则主句要用否定形式，意为动作“到……才……”开始发生。如：
She didn’t get up until her mother came in.
注意：till和until通常情况下可以互换，只是在句首时until比till更常用。
③though、although均引导让步状语从句，意为“虽然……”，although较正式，though最常用。如：
Thouth (Although)he was tired,he kept on working.
注意：though、although引导的从句不能与but、however连用，但可以与yet、still连用。though还可以与别的词结合使用，如even though、
as though,而although则不能这样搭配。
④no sooner … than、hardly … when、as soon as三者都表示“一……就”，“刚刚……就”的意思。（A）as soon as 置于主句前后都可以，而且有备各种时态。如：As soon as she gets here I’ll tell her about
it. Mary left as soon as the finished the work.(B)hardly … when、no sooner … than不能表示将来的事，其主句的谓语动词一般用过去完成时，从句用过去时。若将hardly或no sooner放在句首，句子要倒装。如：No sooner had he arrived than he went away again.
⑤某些表示时间的名词（词组）也可用作从属连词。它们是：the moment, the minute,the instant, the day, the time, the first(second, third …)time, the spring (summer, autumn,winter),every(each,next,
any) time(day),by the time,都可引导时间状语从句。如：
His mother died the spring he returned.
Call me up the minute he arrives.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The home improvements have taken what little there is _________my spare time.(NMET 2001)
A.from B.in C.of D.at
解析：答案为C。本题考查句子结构中介词of的有法。what引导的从句作谓语have taken的宾语，而从句中的基本句型为“there is little of …”,表示“……有很少”，what 修饰little提到了从句句首。注意正确把握句子结构和介词用法，要明白of my spare time和in my spare time的区别。
2. ____________ production up by 60%, the company has had another excellent year.(NMET 2000)
A.As B.For C.With D.Through
解析：答案为C。本题考查with的复合结构作状语的用法。“with + 名词 + 不定式/分词/名词/形容词/介词短语等”可在句中作伴随、时间、原因、条件等状语。本题中with的复合结构作伴随状语。
3. The changes in the city will cost quite a lot, ___________they will save us money in the long run.（2000春季高考题）
A.or B.since C.for D.but
解析：答案为D。本题考查并列连词or、for、but和从属连词的意义和用法。并列连词or通常表示选择关系；for表示因果关系；but表示转折关系；从属连词since表示原因。通过比较前后两个分句意思可知，它们是转折关系。
4. After she considered the problem, she got a tall box to stand ________.
A.on B.up C.above D.by
解析：答案为A。不定式“to stand + 介词”作定语修饰a tall box,其中被修饰词在逻辑意义上是不及物动词，只有加上吊尾介词，句子意思才完整。吊尾介词往往由于受到汉语的影响而缺少，吊尾介词使用的场合有：
（1）定语从句中，先行词被一个不及物动词所修饰，不及物动词后要接介词，先行词被“动词 + 介词”组成的短语动词所修饰，介词常在句尾。
He is the man I just spoke to.
(2)what、whose、who、whatever等引导的宾语从句，宾语从句出现吊尾介词。
I can’t imagine what it is like.
(3) 强调句型，特殊疑问句中由于被强调部分和疑问词位置变更，常出现吊尾介词。
It was the poor boy that we gave the books to.
What for Where to Who with
(4)不及物动词的不定式修饰表“涉及对象、场合、工具、方式、材料”等意义的名词时常带吊尾介词。
a room to live in, a bench to sit on
There is nothing to worry about.
She is a good girl to work with.
(5)某些形容词后接不定式或“动词 + 介词”型短语，动词的不定式形式表“反射”，常用吊尾介词。
①fit、easy、hard、comfortable、difficult、heavy等形容词后。
②The river is good to swim in.
The box is too heavy to carry.
③be worth doing sth.,be worthy of being done / to be done, want/
require / need doing
5.Roses need special care they can live through winter.
A. because B. so that C. even if D. as
解析：答案为B。本题考状语从句。全句意为：玫瑰花需要特殊关心，以便过冬（为了安全度过冬天）。其余选项不合逻辑。
6. you call me to say you’re not coming, I’ll see you at the theatre.
A. Though B. Whether C. Until D. Unless
解析：答案为D。本题考状事从句，全句意为：我将在剧院门口等你，除非你打电话说你不来了。D项表条件，符合句意。A项表让步，意为尽管；B项表让步，意为“不管……（还是……）；”C项表时间，意为“直道……（才……）”，均不和逻辑。
7.Several weeks had gone by I realized the painting was missing.
A. as B. before C. since D. when
解析：答案为B。本题考查连词的用法。时间had passed(gone)by before S + did…在不知不觉中过……（已过去了）。
*11*Unit 1 Phrases
1.练习描写人 practise describing people
2.有所作为 make a difference
3.来自 be from
4.因…而闻名 be known for
5.使一位科学家成功
make a scientist successful
6.想象远比知识更重要
Imagination is more important than knowledge
7.生活中没什么可惧怕的，只有去理解Nothing in life is to be feared, it is only to be understood.
8.天才是1%的灵感+99%的汗水
Genius is one percent inspiration and ninety-nine percent perspiration.
9.分析明显存在的事物需要非凡的头脑
It takes a very unusual mind to undertake analysis of the obvious
10.你不能教会一个人一切，你只能帮助他亲自去发现 You can’t teach a man anything; you can only help him find it within himself.
11.惊人之举 be on fire for
12.与…相似 be similar to
13.三位伟大的思想家 three great minds
14.有共同之处 have … in common
15.毫无疑问 there is no doubt that…
16.一位有前途的研究生
a promising graduate student
17.绝症 an incurable disease
18. 不多于… not… more than
19.放弃对未来的梦想
give up our dreams and hopes for the future.
20.取得博士学位
much point in working on my PhD
21.活那么久 survive that long
22.与…订婚 get/ be engaged to sb
23.为了做… in order to do
24.继续他的研究工作
go on with his research
25.阻止某人做 stop sb from doing
26.梦想 dream of
27.继续探索宇宙
continue his exploration of the universe
28.环游世界去做报告
travel around the world to give lectures/
29.二十世纪七十年代初 in the early 1970s
30.宇宙大爆炸和黑洞
the Big Bang and Black Holes.
31.寻求问题的答案seek answers to questions
32.成为畅销书 become a best-seller
33.惊喜地发现
be pleased and surprised to find
34.以某种方式 in a way
35.结果是错误的 turn out to be wrong
36.科学方法 the scientific method
37.能够预测未来事can predict future events
38.发现很难理解他
find it difficult to understand him
39.听起来像人的声sound like a human voice
40.是…样子 what was … like
41.用完 use up
42.五岁的儿子 a 5-year-old son
43.代替 instead of
44.重力原理 the Law of Gravity
45.环境污染 environmental pollution
46.在接下来的十年里 in the next ten years
47.采取措施解决问题
take measures to solve the problem
48.每76年 every 76 years
49.犯罪现场 the crime scene
50.理应做… be supposed to do
51.用来书写的笔 a pen to write with
52.对…感到满足 be satisfied with
53.就近看 take a closer look at
54.倘使… what if
55.知识就是力量 Knowledge is Power
56.从一季到另一季
from season to season
57.嘲笑 laugh at
58.相反地 the other way around
59.作为…而闻名 be known as
60.达到我们的目标 reach our goals
Unit 2 Phrases
1.以上新闻媒体the news media above
2.不同于 be different from
3.发生在某人身上 sth happen to sb
4.报纸的编辑 the editor of a newspaper
5.把登在报上 put in the newspaper
6.烧倒 burn down
7.搬进新居 move into new buildings
8.发明新汽车引擎 invite a new car engine
9.中国以2：1打败巴西
China beat Brazil 2-1 in football
10.上涨 go up
11.有经验的编辑和记者
experienced editors and reporters
12.根据所了解的情况作出决定
make informed decisions about
13.理解某事 relate to sth
14.同意做 agree to do
15.变换角色 switch roles
16.至少这一次 for once
17.专题报道 a feature story
18.开发情节 develop the story
19.保持报纸平衡
keep the newspaper balanced
20.联系要采访的人
contact the people to be interviewed
21. 使人们谈论 get people to talk about
22.条分理析地呈现材料
present the material in an organized way
23.确保 make sure
24.被盗的文物 stolen cultural relics
25.带回 bring back
26.这一领域的国际专家
international experts in the field
27.适应新生活 adapt to her new life
28.用真实的感情去写
write with real passion
29.探索生活中的秘密
explore the mysteries in life
30.精神满足的重要性
the importance of spiritual fulfillment
31.沉溺于吸毒 be addicted to drugs
32.解决社会难题
solve difficult social problems
33.遭受 suffer from
34.不应忽视所发生的一切
shouldn’t ignore what happens
35.关注这一境况
draw attention to situations
36.需要帮助的地方 where help is needed
37.方方面面 on all sides
38.批判性的读者 be a critical reader
39.时事 current affairs
40.评论热门话题
comment on a “hot topic”
41.被选为总统 be elected president
42.做某事无困难
have no problems doing sth
43.对…粗鲁 be rude to
44.收集信息 collect information on
45.吸毒的人们 people addicted to drugs
46.十分之九的妇女
nine out of ten women
47.位于市中心
be located in the center of the town
48.退休工人 retired workers
49.敬重某人 look up to sb
50.爱上… fall in love with
51.改变他们对足球的态度
change their attitude towards soccer
52.警察局 the police station
53.发表意见 make their voices heard
54.提出积极的建议
leave a positive message
55.一群挥舞棍棒的打手
a group of angry men armed with sticks
56.赚钱 make money
57.一直在改变 change all the way
58.不是所有的网站都更新
not all websites are updated
59.标题句 a topic sentence
60.聚焦于 focus on
Unit 3 Phrases
1. 喜欢做 prefer to do
2.做出关于…决定
make certain choices about
3.艺术品 works of art
4.餐桌 kitchen table
5.古典音乐 classical music
6.住在现代化的公寓里 live in a modern flat
7.传统房屋 a traditional house
8.做…很便利 it is convenient to do
9.对于古式房屋很感兴趣
get excited about old-style houses
10.古典的中式建筑
classical Chinese architecture
11.取之于大自然的例子
take examples from nature
12.人为的居住环境
the man-made living environment
13.环顾 look around at
14.违背人们的审美观
go against people’s feeling of beauty
15.传统的建筑材料
traditional architecture materials
16.尖角 sharp corners
17.充当 act as
18.似乎又硬又不友善
seems hard and unfriendly
19.天坛 the Temple of Heaven
20.欧洲大教学 the European cathedrals
21.贴近大自然 stand much closer to nature
22.直线 straight lines
23.被鱼皮覆盖
be covered with the skin of skin
24.充满梦幻的色彩与形状
full of fantastic colors and shapes
25.发现自己受日本海贝的鼓舞
find himself inspired by Japanese seashells
26.从顶上看，它看起来好像
Seen from the top, it looks as if
27.被覆盖 be covered with
28.用…填满空间 fill up spaces with
29.指, 参考 refer to
30.利用 make use of
31.属于 belong to
32.A对B就像C对D: A is to B what C is to D
33.使自己被理解 make oneself understood
34.在背后说某人的坏话
say bad words behind one’s back
35.尽快地 as soon as possible
36.使我了解… keep informed of
37.价格在我看来很合适
the price is fine with me
38.做…成功 succeed in doing
39.把画贴在墙上
put up the picture on the wall
40.不适合他们公司does not fit their company
41.使…倒空 leave … empty
42.拆除 pull down
43.废弃多年
stand empty without use for many years
44.在俄罗斯人的帮助下with Russian help
45.用小圆窗装饰
be decorated with small round windows
46.使某人想起 remind sb of
47.与…比较 compared with
48.把…放到一边 set … aside
49.开发成艺术中心
the development into a center for the arts
50.把他们用作画室
use them as studios to paint
51.改变成 be changed into
52.被用作 be used for
53.对艺术家有好处 be good for artists
54.大作品 make large objects
55.远离城市 far from the city
56.摇滚乐师的迁入 rock musicians move in
57.制定计划 make a plan
58.每个大厅特征 special features of each hall
59.创办艺术中心 create an art center
60.列出你喜欢的名单求意见
make lists of your favorite
Unit 4 Phrases
1.无论是公汽还是火车
whether buses or trains
2.穿过 get through
3.疯了 as mad as a door
4.诗的乐园 a garden of poems
5.根据…分类 be sorted by
6.关于友谊和爱情的浪漫诗集
romantic poetry about love and friendship
7.聚集到一起 bring together
8.超过其他文学的任何形式
more than any other form of literature
9.灵活运用 play with
10.唤起，使想起 call up
11.梦幻世界的奇意象
curious images of a dream world
12.兀立于荣光宝殿之上
stand out in the halls of glory
13.遵循特殊的节奏和韵脚
follow special patterns of rhythm and rhyme
14.以他的戏剧而闻名
be most famous for his plays
15.使他们想起 remind them of
16.一旦被出版 once published
17.缺少节奏感 the absence of thyme
18.在每一行末 at the end of each line
19.许多杰出诗人 a great number of fine poets
20.在中国最受欢迎的是英国浪漫主义诗人 Greatly loved in China are the English Romantic poets
21.英年早逝 die at a very young age
22.活到80岁 live to the age of 80
23.通向，导致 lead to
24.英国诗歌引进中国
the introduction of English poetry to China
25.把…翻译成汉语 translate into Chinese
26.现代英语诗modern poetry in English
27.不管一首诗被翻译得多好
no matter how well a poem is translated
28.原作的精髓
something of the spirit of the original work
29.用汉语表达自己的方式
ways of expressing oneself in Chinese
30.中西方的桥梁
the bridges between the East and the West
31.产生，形成 come into being
32. …的一例 one example of
33.在老师不在的情况下
in the absence of the teacher
34.负责 be in charge of
35.温暖又友好的会议气氛 the atmosphere of the meeting is warm and friendly
36.奥运冠军 the Olympic Champion
37.西游记 Journey to the West
38.夜里被噪声吓坏
frightened by noises in the night
39.被跟踪 be followed by
40.寻求帮助 send for help
41.如果被单独留在沙漠中
If left alone on a deserted island
42.收到做报告的请柬 receive many invitations to give lectures
43.受中国青年的欢
become popular among Chinese teenagers
44.唱我最喜欢的歌sing my favorite songs
45.渡过这一天 get through the day
46.处于灰色和深色之间
colors in the middle of grays and shades
47.过去逃避诗 used to avoid poetry
48.查找词意
look up the meaning of the words
49.体验到节奏感 fall into the rhythm
50.从小诗开始 start with small poems
51.借助烛光 by the light of candle
52.悲伤一去不复返 my sadness is gone
53.雪尘 the dust of snow
54.心情的改变 a change of mood
55.几乎发狂 slowly go insane
56.不能摆脱痛苦 it doesn’t stop the pain
57.如果从此再也不能相见
if I see you next to never
58.诗的收藏 collections of poems
59.向你推荐诗 recommend poems to you
60.很值得努力 be well worth the effort
Unit 5 Phrases
1. 代表，象征 stand for
2.他们对于英国文化的看法
their view of British culture
3.由三个国家组成
be made up of three countries
4.（某物）不为人所知 be unknown to many
5.开展蓬勃发展的运动 a growing movement
6.由共同语言和文化维系在一hold together by a common language and culture
7.位于欧洲西海岸外
lie off the west coast of Europe
8.被英吉利海峡与法国隔开 separate from France by the English Channel
9.形成大不列颠本土 form the mainland of Great Britain
10.组成 consist of
11.被…包围 be surrounded by
12.温和多雨 mild with a lot of rain
13.一般说来 in general
14.全年，一年到头 throughout the year
15.伦敦与北方的温差
the difference in temperature between London and the north
16.受…影响 be influenced by
17.定居英格兰 settle in England
18.形成英语的基础 for the basis for English
19.一些本地人some of the native population
20.继续讲他们自己的语言
continue speaking their own language
21.其后几百年来
in the next few hundred years
22.上层阶级 the upper classes
23.老百姓 common people
24.以… 结束 end up with
25.组成联邦 form the Union
26.成立一个单独的国家 form a single state
27.是一个独立的共和国
be now an independent republic
28.在现代 in modern times
29.被认为是不列颠岛的本族语 be considered to be native to the British Isles.
30.把这些语言记录不来并传给后record and teach them to the younger generation
31.中华人民共和国
the People’s Republic of China
32.允许反方向的车通过
allow cars from opposite directions to pass
33.由于她的教师的影响 because of her teacher’s influence
34.凭第一印象判断人 judge a person only on the basis of first impressions
35.学些实际有用的东西 learn sth practical
36.节食 be on a diet
37.令家长和教师担心
worry their parents an teachers
38.在中国进行三天的访问
be on a three-day visit in China
39.没有科学的证据
there is no scientific proof for
40.筹集许多钱去帮助癌症的研究
raise a lot of money to help research into the breast cancer
41.遍及整个城市 all around the city
42.饲养羊 raise sheep
43.多达六十万只羊
an many as six hundred thousand sheep
44. 许多古代的文物
many old relics form ancient times
45.土著人墟废ruins of the native population
46. 以其塔楼的高度而闻名
be famous for the height of its tower
47.毫无疑问 without doubt
48.距地面404英尺be from the ground 404 feet
49.两大重要产品和行业
two important kinds of produce and trade
50.许多好规矩 a great deal of good manners
51.生产水果和谷物的肥沃田地
rich fields bearing fruit and grain
52.对…感到吃惊 be surprised with
53.有机会再来中国
get the chance to come to China again
54.众所周知 be well known to all
55.通过努力在英语方面取得更大进步 make greater progress in English through hard work
56.对人的健康有害be bad for people’s health
57.最使我吃惊的 what surprised me most
58.世界强国 world’s most powerful nations
59.学生会 the Students’ Union
60.没有人能把台湾和中国分开 nobody can separate Taiwan from China
Unit 6 Phrases
1. 在你听来很古怪 sound absurd to you
2.陪伴我们 keep us company
3.我们在一起很有趣
we have lots of fun together
4.从她的内存下载资料
download information form her memory
5.识别电话里的声音
recognize a person’s voice on the phone
6.远程教育 distance education
7.成为终身学习者 become lifelong learners
8.欣赏新的和不同的东西
appreciate what is new and different
9.在健康和医学领域
in the field of health and medicine
10.听天气预报 listen to the weather forecast
11.得回双倍的钱 get double their money
12.含有微型芯片 contain a tiny chip
13.脖上手上戴微型电脑wear tiny computers
around one’s neck or on one’s wrist
14.医学的进步 advances in medical science
15.就…提出建议 give advice on
16.帮助父母做家务
help their parents with the housework
17.写故事的结局 write an ending to the story
18.记忆把她带回1998年春天 his memory
brought him back to the spring of 1998
19.在遗传和生物化学的新发现
new discoveries in genetics and biochemistry
20.空中学校和网络学校
schools on the air and e-schools
21.开一家网上购物商店open an online store
22.看起来像人类 looks just like a human being
23.输入照顾我的程序
be programmed to take care of me
24.模仿真实的世界 imitate the real world
25.打发我的电子朋友清理房间
send my e-friend to clean up my room
26.随时随地 whenever they have time and wherever they may be
27.我们的梦想是否会实现
whether our dreams come true
28.有准备地迎接未来所带给我们的
be well-prepared for whatever the future may have in store
29.拥有光明的未来 have a bright future
30.时尚 the trends of fashion
31.快餐店 the fast food restaurant
32.年纪大了很活跃
remain active even in old age
33. 更注重健康饮食的重要性pay more attention to the importance of a healthy diet
34.旅行时带太多的现金
carry too much cash when you travel
35.治疗新的疾病 deal with new diseases
36.喜欢网上冲浪 be fond of surfing the Internet
37.人类能生活在火星上
man be able to live on Mars.
38.随着对人体的更深入的了解
with a better understanding of a human body
39.完全不同于今天的样子
be quite different from what they are today
40.使用智能卡 use smart cards
41.未来的生活会是什么样
what life will be like in the future
42.预测未来的发展
make forecast about future developments
43.购物付款 pay for their purchases
44.窥测未来 catch a glimpse of the future
45.当代社会的主要趋势
the major trends in contemporary society
46.把购物与娱乐相结合
combine shopping with fun
47.当前的趋势表明了 current trends indicate
48.到拥护的商店寻找必须品
search a crowded store for basic goods
49.环保，节能
be environmentally friendly, energy-saving
50.以430千米/小时运行
travel at an amazing 430km/m
51.保证安全 ensure safety
52.与国外公司和客户保持联系
keep in touch with customers and companies in other countries
53.变成了一种娱乐方式
become a form of entertainment
54.不必担心我们是否污染环境
without worrying about whether we are polluting the environment
55.将来的商业不会是现在样子
it will not be business as usual
56.开始改变他们做生意的方式
begin reforming the way they do business
57.发现网上购物的好处
advantages of on line shopping
58.通过互联网做生意
business done on the Internet
59.虚拟现实 virtual reality
60.听说过这种新磁悬浮列车
hear of the new maglev train
Unit 7 Phrases
1.接受或容忍 live with
2.对艾滋病人的态度 attitudes towards AIDS
3.感染艾滋病毒
become infected with HIV
4.很难治愈 be difficult to cure
5.通过以下途径传播
be transmitted via the following routes
6.疾病预防控制中心
the Center for Disease Control and Prevention
7.当今最严重的社会问题
the most serious problem today
8.几百万儿童 millions of children
9.破坏人体的免役系统
break down the body’s immune system
10.至于，就…来说 as in one’s case
11.照顾，照看 take care of
12.想念她的母亲 miss her mother
13.受感染儿童的总数
the total number of infected children
14.缺乏适当的医疗保健 a lick of proper health care
15.非常昂贵 much too expensive
16.有机会做某事 have a chance to do
17.鼓励某人做某事 encourage sb to do
18.学会如何自我保护 learn how to protect oneself
19.支持某人 support sb
20.使…感到振奋 cheer them up
21.选择做个医生 choose to be a doctor
22.面对人们对于艾滋病的恐惧
deal with people’s fear of the disease
23.建一个病人与医生的联系网络
create a network of patients and doctors
24.说服某人做某事 persuade sb to do
25.给艾滋病的研究和教育投入更多资金
spend more money on AIDS research and education
26.查清实情 find out the facts
27.一位艾滋病专家 an AIDS specialist
28.与某人握手 shake hands with sb
29.解释艾滋病的传播方式
explain how AIDS spread
30.拥抱某人 give an AIDS patient a hug
31.感到孤单 feel lonely
32.遇到许多困难 meet many difficulties
33.继续与疾病作斗争
continue struggle with the disease
34.一班迟到 be late for work
35.网球赛中失败
be defeated in the tennis match
36.做…是没有用的 it is no use doing
37.感冒的最限治疗方法
the best treatment for a cold
38.阻止某人做某事
discourage sb from doing
39.浪费时间玩电脑游
waste time playing computer games
40.很长时间感到恶心
feel sick for a long time
41.带我去医院做检查
take me to hospital to have me examined
42.采血样 take samples of my blood
43.目光悲伤
there was a sad look in one’s eyes
44.患了重症
suffer from a serious disease
45.不治之症 an incurable disease
46.有特殊的功能 have a special function
47.不在人与人之间传播
not spread from one person to another
48.跟许多癌症患者一样
like many people with cancer
49.接受放疗化疗be treated with radiation
50.不让我感到孤独和悲伤
keep me from feeling sad and lonely
51.相反地 on the contrary
52.把…当作一个礼物
think of my cancer as a gift
53.给我上了重要的人生一课
teach me an important lesson about life
54.使我认识到生命的珍贵
make me realize how precious life is
55.抓住一切机会充实生活
take every chance to live life to the fullest
56.学会欣赏每一天的每一分钟
learn to appreciate every minute of each day
57.改变某人的生活 change one’s life
58.从自行车上摔下来 fall off my bike
59.完全摆脱疾病
be completely free from diseases
60.钢琴赛上获奖
win a prize at a piano competition
Unit 8 Phrases
1. 失火，着火 catch fire
2.颠倒 upside down
3.她看起来好像死了 it looked as if she were dead
4.进行急救 give first aid
5.目击事故 witness an accident
6.紧急情况下分秒必争
seconds count in an emergency
7.记住 keep in mind
8.做出决定 make better decisions
9.准备应急 prepare for an emergency
10.保持冷静 stay calm
11.怎么办 what to do
12.挽救生命 save lives
13.推荐我们使用字母DR　ＡＢＣ
recommend that we use the letters DR ABC
14.代表 stand for
15.首先 first of all
16.受伤 get hurt
17.确保呼吸道是畅通的，呼吸很容易
make sure that a person’s airway is open and it is easy to breathe
18.救援即将来临 help is on the way
19.轻敲某人后脑 tip the person’s head back slightly
20.人工呼吸 the mouth-to-mouth method
21. 等待救护车的到来 wait for the ambulance
22.把手放在人的脖子上、手腕上
put a finger on the person’s neck or wrist
23.用干净的布盖住伤口
cover the wound with a clean piece of cloth
24.按住伤口止血
press on the wound to stop the bleeding
25.叫救护车 call an ambulance
26.把人置于康复位置
put the person in the recovery position
27.把人滚向一侧 roll the person onto one side
28.用毯子盖住某人 cover the person with a blanket
29.帮他保暖 help him stay warm
30.设法了解足够的知识用来救命
manage to know enough to save lives
31.朝我喊叫 shout at me
32.保持平静不理睬她 keep calm and ignore her
33.摸脉 take a person’s pulse
34.没有明显的反应 give no clear response
35.分四组讨论问题
discuss the questions in groups of four
36.犯错误 make many mistakes
37.如果我们惊慌。我们就不能帮助 if we were to panic, we would not be able to help
38.迷路 lose one’s way
39.去野餐 go for a picnic
40.死于突发性心脏病
die of a sudden heart attack
41.煤气中毒 be gas-poisoned
42.太靠近湖 get too close to the lake
43.他根本就没经验
he has no experience at all
44.关掉所有的电源 turn off all power
45.某事发生在某人身上 sth happen to sb
46.用来纪念这位伟人
in honor of this great man
47.阻止事情发生 prevent bad things from happening
48.处理常见伤 deal with common injuries
49.用流水冲洗伤口
wash the wound with cold running water
50.马上给皮肤降温
cool the area of skin at once
51.搜索房间寻找药物
search the room for any pills
52.把你所找到的一切送到医院
send whatever you find to the hospital
53.腿上有一把刀 with a knife in his leg
54.被狗咬 be bitten by dog
55.事故现场是安全的 the scene of the accident is safe
56.急救箱 a first-aid kit
57.以防紧急情况 in case of an emergency
58.紧急电话号码清单
a list of emergency phone number
59.如果一个人失1/3血,就会死if a person loses one third of his blood, he may die
60.把报纸拿颠倒
hold a newspaper upside down
Unit 9 Phrases
1. 解决问题难者 solve the problem
2.生产能量 produce energy
3.出席会议 attend the meeting
4.地球峰会 the Earth summit
5.欢迎参加地球峰会 welcome to the earth summit
6.联合国 the United Nations
7.南非 South Africa
8.这次峰会的主题 the main themes of the summit
9.可持续发展 sustainable development
10.关于不同题目发表演讲
speak about different topics
11.三大公害 the big three
12.饮水污染 contaminated drinking water
13.卫生状况恶劣 poor sanitation
14.世界卫生组织 the World Health Organization
15.地球上的人们 the people on earth
16.喝到洁净的水
have access to clean drinking water
17.在农村地区 in rural areas
18.贫困、战争与暴力 poverty, war and violence
19.参与我们创造新世界
take part in the new world we create
20.强调世界范围的平等与公正
stress the need for equality and direness in the world
21.对…负有责任 have a responsibility towards
22.国际间的合作 international cooperation
23.存在严重的问题 there exist serious problems
24.来得及采取措施 there is still time to take action
25.对环境不利 be bad for the environment
26.空调 air conditioners
27.如果我们稍作改变，就会有大的成效
if all of us make small changes, we could make a big difference
28.在全世界传播 spread across the world
29. 行动的愿望 the willingness to act
30. 寻找解决未来问题的方法
find solutions for the future
31. 未来的关键 the key to the future
32. 与大自然协调 in harmony with nature
33. 结束死亡和痛苦
put an end to the death and suffering
34. 有可能会 there is good chance that
35.保护水资源 protect the water resources
36.消除贫困 wipe out the poverty
37.与男子有同等的机会
have true equality of opportunity with men
38.售货员的工作职责
the job responsibilities as a shop assistant
39.中国代表 Chinese representatives
40.得出结论 draw a conclusion
41.采取行动拯救地球
take action to save the earth
42.表示愿意来帮忙
show great willingness to come and help
43.对于全球变暖了解不多
not know much about global warming
44.学会与大自然和平共处
learn to live in harmony with nature
45.做重要的讲话
make a very important speech
46.住院 be in hospital
47.当地政府决定迁移工厂 the local government decided to move the factories
48.来自发展中国家的人
people from developing countries
49.限制汽车的数量
limit the number of cars
50.利用可选择性的交通
make use of alternative transportation
51.我们要行动 we need action
52.步行骑自行车和合伙用车
walking, biking and car-pooling
53.挣钱 make money
54.准备好回答问题
be ready to answer questions
55.为你的论点辩护 defend your argument
56.发表你的观点 give your opinion
57.尽可能多地列出理由
list as many reasons as possible
58.建议某人不要做某事advise sb not to do
59.完成关于环保的报告finish writing his report on environmental protection
60.不要砍伐树木stop cutting down trees
Unit 10 Phrases
1. 大自然对人构成危险
nature form a danger to people
2.科学帮助减小威胁 science help reduce that threat
3.对…很重要 be important to
4.飓风袭击海岸 a hurricane hits the coast
5.一点也不/很，非常 not a bit/ not a little
6.被吓死 be scared to death
7.陷入惊慌 get into a total panic
8.汽车飞到空中 cars go up in the air
9.它使我毛发倒竖 make my hair stand on end
10.死于难忘的灾难 die in an unforgettable disaster
11.吸引我叔叔的注意力 draw my uncle’s attention
12.距离遥远 at such a distance
13.到近处去看个究竟 see it from closer at hand
14.它唤醒我叔叔身上的科学意识 it awake the scientist in my uncle
15.她家位于维苏威火山脚下
her house lay at the foot of Vesuvius
16.请求他救她 beg him to save her
17.初衷为寻求知识的旅行
start out as a trip for knowledge
18.需要勇气 call for courage
19.从…逃走 flee from
20.直奔危险地带
hold his course directly into danger
21.我认为不是这样的 I don’t think so
22.停顿了一会儿 pause for moment
23.营救他的朋友 rescue his friend
24.我叔叔一到，就拥抱了庞皮
upon arrival, my uncle hugged Pompy
25.帮助别人镇静 help the other calm down
26.给大家留下印象 give everyone the impression
27.惊慌地离开 leave in a panic
28.燃烧的石头雨 a rain of burning rocks
29.随后闻到了硫磺味
then came a smell of sulphur
30.在两个奴隶的帮助下，他站了起来
Helped by two slaves he stood up
31.立即倒地死去了 immediately fall down dead
32.与其说他看起来死了，不如说睡着了
he looked more sleep than dead
33.记忆犹新 memories are still fresh
34.择要摘取 pick out the important bits
35.活火山 the active volcano
36.被灰尘覆盖
be covered with dirt and ashes
37.复活 come to life
38.埋藏了岛国的首都
bury the capital of the island nation
39.清理的费用 costs for cleaning up
40.催促别国来帮忙
urge other countries to help
41.答应援助100万英镑
promise to offer 1 million pounds in aid
42.热烈欢迎他的到来
be warmly welcomed on his arrival
43.是否 whether … or not
44.你看起来不像是老师 don’t look very much like a teacher
45.返回到故乡 return to their home village
46.天气闷热 the heat is close
47.坏天气就要来临 dirty weather knocking about
48.抬头看天 lift his eyes to the sky
49.突如其来 all of a sudden
50.强劲的飓风
the full force of the hurricane
51.驾驶船驶向大海
move the ship over the high sea
52.风暴中心 the very eye of the wind
53.白色的泡沫水柱 a white tower of water
54.它奔腾着冲向轮船
it raced to meet the ship
55.没有风，纹丝不动
there was no wind, not a breath
56.风一下子小了下去 wind fell all at once
57.把火焰凑近气压表 hold out the little flame towards to the barometer
58.风呼啸着靠近了
the roar of the winds drew near fast
59.国内外的天气
the weather at home and abroad
60.天气状况 the weather conditions语法复习专题（7）
Unit7 动词时态和语态
一、考点聚焦
1、动词时态考查要点简述
（1）一般现在时考点分析
①表示客观事实或普通真理（不受时态限制）
The geography teacher told us the earth moves around the sun.
Water boils at 100oC.
②表示现状、性质、状态时多用系动词或状态动词；表示经常或习惯性的动作，多用动作动词，且常与表频率的时间状语连用。
Ice feels cold.
We always care for each other and help each other.
③表示知觉、态度、感情、某种抽象的关系或概念的词常用一般现在时：see、hear、smell、taste、feel、notice、agree、believe、like、hate、want、think、belong seem等。如：
I know what you mean.
Smith owns a car and a house.
All the students here belong to No.1 Middle School.
④在时间、条件状语从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。但要注意由if 引导的条件状语从句中可以用shall或will表“意愿”，但不表示时态。
If you will accept my invitation and come to our party, my family will be pleased.如果你愿意接受并参加我们的舞会，我的家人会非常高兴。
⑤少数用于表示起止的动词如come、go、leave、arrive、fly、return、start、begin、pen、close、end、stop等常用一般现在时代替将来时，表示一个按规定、计划或安排要发生的动作。当be表示根据时间或事先安排，肯定会出现的状态，只用一般现在时。
The shop closes at 11:00 p.m. every day.
Tomorrow is Wednesday.
（2）一般过去时的考点分析（考核重点）。
①一般过去时的基本用法：表示过去的事情、动作或状态常与表示过去具体的时间状语连用（或有上下文语境暗示）；用于表达过去的习惯；表示说话人原来没有料到、想到或希望的事通常用过去式。如：
I met her in the street yesterday.
I once saw the famous star here.
They never drank wine.
I thought the film would be interesting,but it isn’t.
②如果从句中有一个过去的时间状语，尽管从句中的动作先于主句发生，但从句中的谓语动词连用过去式。如：
He told me he read an interesting novel last night.
③表示两个紧接着发生的动作，常由以下词语连接，用一般过去时。如：but, and, when, as soon as, immediately, the moment, the minute。
The moment she came in, she told me what had happened to her.
He bought a watch but lost it.
④常用一般过去时的句型：
Why didn’t you / I think of that
I didn’t notice it.
I forgot to tell you I had been there with my brother before.
I didn’t recognize him.
（3）一般将来时考点分析。
①表示未来的动作或状态常用will / shall + 动词（常与表示将来的时间状语边用如tomorrow、next week等）。
②表示一种趋向或习惯动作。
We’ll die without air or water.
③表示趋向行为的动词如come、go、start、begin、leave等词常用进行时的形式表示将来时。
④be going to与will / shall, be to do, be about to do用法及区别：
be going to 表示现在打算在最近或将来要做某事，这种打算往往经过事先考虑，甚至已做了某种准备；shall / will do表示未事先考虑过，即说话时临时作出的决定。
be going to 表将来，不能用在条件状语从句的主句中；而will则能，表意愿。如：
If it is fine, we’ll go fishing.(正确)
If it is fine, we are going to go fishing.(错误)
be to do sth.表按计划、安排即将发生的动作，还可表示吩咐、命令、禁止，可能性等。
A meeting is to be held at 3:00 o’clock this afternoon.
be about to do sth.表示“即可，就要”，后面不能接时间状语或状语从句。
Autumn harvest is about to start.
（4）现在进行时考点分析。
①表示说话时正在发生着的一个动作；表示现阶段但不一定是发生在讲话时；表近期特定的安排或计划；go、come等起止动作可用进行时代替将来时。如：
It is raining now.
He is teaching English and learning Chinese.
I am meeting Mr. Wang tonight.
We are leaving on Friday.
At six I am bathing the baby.(I start bathing the bady before six.)
The girl is always talking loud in public.(与always、often等频度副词连用，表经常反复的行动或某种感彩)
②下面四类动词不宜用现在进行时。（A）表示心理状态、情感的动作：like, love, hate, care, remember, believe, want, mind, wish, agree, mean, need。（B）表存在的状态的动词：appear, exist, lie, remain, seem belong to, depend on。（C）表示一时性动作的动词：allow, accept, permit, promise, admit, complete。（D）表示感官的动词：see, hear, notice, feel, smell, sound, taste, look。
（5）过去完成时考点分析（考核重点）。
①常用过去完成时的几种情况：（A）在by、by the end、by the time、until、before、since后接表示过去某一时间的短语或从句以前发生的动作。如：By the end of last year, we had produced 20,000 cars. The train had left before we reached the station. (B)表示曾实现的希望、打算、意图、诺言等。常用had hoped / planned / meant / intended/
though / wanted / expected等或用上述动词过去式接不定式完成式表示即：hoped / planned … + to have done。（C）“时间名词 + before”在句子中作状语，谓语动词用过去完成时；“时间名词 + ago”在句中作状语，谓语动词用一般过去式。如：He said his first teacher had died at least 10 years before. Xiao Hua left school 3 years ago.（D）表示“一……就”的几个句型：Hardly / No sooner / Scarcely had + 主语 + 过去分词 + when / than / before + 一般过去时。如：We had no sooner been seated than the bus started. = No sooner had we been seated than the bus started.
②在before或after引导的时间状语从句中用一般过去时态代替过去完成时。
After he (had)left the room, the boss came in.
We arrived home before it snowed.
（6）过去将来时考点分析。
参照一般将来时对比：用would do、was / were going to do sth.表过去将来；come、go、leave等过去进行时表过去将来时；was / were to do sth.和was / were about to do sth.表过去将来。
（7）过去进行时考点分析。
①过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或某一阶段内发生或频繁发生。
②某一动作发生时另一动作正在发生，其中一个在由when或while引导的时间状语从句中。
（8）现在完成时考点分析。
①现在完成时除可以和for、since引导的状语连用外，还可以和下面的介词短语连用：during / in /over the last(past)few years (months, weeks)、in recent years等。
②下列句型中常用现在完成时
It is (has been) + 一段时间 + since从句
This(That / It)is the first(second…)time that + 完成时
This(That / It)is the only … + that + 完成时
This(that / It)is the best / finest / most interesting … + that 从句 + 完成时
③在时间或条件状语从句中，现在完成时可以代替一般将来时。如：
I shall post the letter as soon as I have written it.
If you have done the experiment, you will realize the theory better.
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
（9）注意几组时态的区别：
①一般过去时与现在完成时：时间上有差异：凡有过去时间的均用过去时态，不能用完成时态，如含有ago、last year、just now、the other day等。
结果上有差异：现在完成时强调的是对“现在”的影响和结果，动作到现在刚完成或还在继续；一般过去时强调的是动作发生在“过去”，和现在毫无关系。
②过去完成时与一般过去时：过去完成时强调的是“过去的过去”；如出现同一主语连续几个动作（“连谓”）形式则只用一般过去时即可。
2、被动语态考查要点简述
被动语态的构成方式：be + 过去分词，口语只也有用get / become + 过去分词表示。被动语态的基本用法：不知道或没必要提到动作的执行者是谁时用被动语态。强调或突出动作的承受者常用被动语态（by短语有时可以省略）。
（1）使用被动语态时应注意的几个问题。
①主动变化被动时双宾语的变化。看下列例句。
My friend gave me an interesting book on my birthday.
An interesting book was given to me(by my friend)on my birthday.
I was given an interesting book (by my friend)on my birthday.
②主动变被动时，宾补成主补（位置不变）；（作补语的）不定式前需加to。
The boss made him work all day long.
He was made to work all day long(by the boss)
③短语动词变被动语态时，勿要掉“尾巴”。
The children were taken good care of (by her).
Your pronunciation and spelling should be paid attention to.
④情态动词和be going to、be to、be sure to、used to、have to、had better等结构变被动语态，只需将它们后面的动词原形变为be +过去分词。
⑤当句子的谓语为say、believe、expect、think、know、write、consider、report等时，被动语态有两种形式：（A）谓语动词用被动语态，动词不定式作主补。（B）用it作形式主语，真正的主语在后面用主语在后面用主语从句来表示。如：
People say he is a smart boy.
It is said that he is a smart boy.
He is said to be a smart boy.
People know paper was made in China first.
It is known that paper was made in China first.
Paper was known to be made in China first.
类似句型有：It is said / known / suggested / believed / hoped/ thought that …
（2）不能用被动语态的几种情况。
①所有的不及物动词或不及物动词词组不能用于被动语态之中。
②表示状态的谓语动词，如：last、hold、benefit、contain、equal、fit、join、mean、last、look like、consist to等。
③表示归属的动词，如have、own、belong to等。
④表示“希望、意图”的动词，如：wish、want、hope、like、love、hate等。
⑤宾语是反身代词或相互代词时谓语动词用主动语态，不能用被动语态。
⑥宾语是同源宾语，不定式、动名词等谓语动词不用被动语态。
⑦有些动词以其主动形式表示被动意义，特别是当主语是物时，常见的动词有sell、write、wash、open、lock等。
（3）主动形式表被动意义。
①当feel、look、smell、taste、sound等后面接形容词时；当cut、read、sell、wear、write等词带状语修饰语时；当动词表示“开始、结束、关、停、转、启动”等意义时。
This kind of cloth washes easily.这种布易洗。
These novels won’t sell well.这些小说不畅销。
My pen writes smoothly.我的钢笔写起来很流畅。
The door won’t lock.门锁不上。
The fish smells good.鱼闻起来香。
②当break out、take place、shut off、turn off、work out等动词表示“发生、关闭、制定”等意思时。
The plan worked out successfully.
The lamps on the wall turn off.
③want, require, need后面的动名词用主动表示被动含义。
④be worth doing用主动形式表示被动含义。
⑤在“be + 形容词 + to do”中，不定式的逻辑宾语是句子的主语，用主动代被动。
This kind of water isn’t fit to drink.
The girl isn’t easy to get along with.
另外：be to blame(受谴责)，be to rent（出租）也用主动形式表被动。
（4）被动形式表示主动意义的几种情况。
①be seated坐着
He is seated on a bench.（He seats himself on a bench.）坐在凳子上。
②be hidden躲藏
He was hidden behind the door.(He hid himself behind the door.)他藏在门后。
③be lost迷路
④be drunk喝醉
⑤be dressed穿着
The girl was dressed in a red short skirt.
（5）被动语态与系表结构的区别
被动语态强调动作；系表结构表主语的特点或状态。如：
The book was sold by a certain bookstore.(被动语态)
The book is well sold.(系表结构)
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. Visitors ________not to touch the exhibits.(NMET 2001)
A.will request B.are requested
C.are requesting D.request
解析：答案为B。此题的时态是不难判断的，因为说的是一条规定，所以用一般现在时，而visitor与request之间是动宾关系，即request visitors not to touch the exhibits,究竟是谁要求他们这样做呢？不清楚，也不必知道，因此需要用被动语态。分析visitors与request之间的关系是此题的解题关键。
2. Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is no easy task because technology __________ so rapidly.(NMET 2001)
A.is changing B.has changed
C.will have changed D.will change
解析：答案为A。此题考查现在进行时态的用法。句意为“选择一部移动电话不是一件容易的事，因为科技发展得十分迅速。”本句的主句一般现在时表达的是目前的情况，而“科技发展迅速”也是现阶段正存在的一种状态，不是在过去，也不是在将来，因此只能用现在进行时表达。
3. All the preparations for the task ___________, and we’re ready to start.（2000年春季高考）
A.completed B.complete
C.had been completed D.have been completed
解析：答案为D。现在完成时表示过去年做的事对现在的影响。从and we’re ready to start句意可知，一切准备工作已经就绪，可以开始工作了。complete是及物动词，与句子的主语是被动关系，所以需要用被动语态表达。注意①分清complete与主语之间的关系；②结合语境选择正确时态。
4.My mind wasn’t on what he was saying so I’m afraid I half of it.
A. was missing B. had missed C. will miss D. missed
解析：答案为D。本句考时态和语境。全句意思是；我的心没在他说的话上，所以恐怕他说的话我有一半没听到。整个事情是过去的事，且是做过的事，所以选一般过去时D。
5.The discussion alive when an interesting topic was brought in.
A. was coming B. had come C. has come D. came
解析：答案为D。come alive“变得活跃”。照顾时间状语从句时态一致时。
6.—I hear Jane has gone to the Holy Island for her holiday.
—Oh, how nice! Do you know when she
A. was leaving B. had left C. has left D. left
解析：答案为D。考查动词时态，由现完成时的用法，可知动作发生在过去，故选D。
*7*高二英语新教材Unit 11 some phrases
1. 重力原理 the Theory of Gravity
2. 有共同之处 have anything in common
3. 从事仙炎星发射载人飞船
work on sending a manned spaceship
4. 必将发生 have in store for
5. 很可能 it is likely that
6. 作为经济特区被建设
set up as a special economic zone
7. 中国科学技术的中心the new center for Chinese science and technology
8.中科院所在地
home to the Chinese Academy of Sciences
9.中国高科技产业的领头羊
the leader of China’s hi-tech industry
10.开办一所么人研究及发展机构open a private research and development institute
11.具有创新精神和科学技能share the spirit of creativity and scientific skill
12.使中关村成功
make Zhongguancun a success
13.抓住机会到国内来实现他们的理想grasp the opportunity to develop their ideas at home
14.实现梦想 follow one’s dream
15.在人所学领域与顶级科学家们共事
work with some of the top scientists in my field
16.我认为这在我看来很完美
I knew it was perfect for me
17.帮助安排回国事宜help arrange for his return
18.踏进 set foot in / on
19.对…有积极的影响 have a positive effect on
20.依靠科学技术和知识
rely on science technology and knowledge
21.发展经济实力 increase economic power
22.弄清楚 make it clear
23.鼓励创新,接受挑战
encourage pioneering work and accept failure
24.应对失败并从中吸取教训
deal with and learn from failure
25.对……感到兴奋 be excited about
26.活跃起来 come to life
27.同时为祖国做出贡献
contribute to his country at the same time
28.硕士学位 a master’s degree
29.美国的硅谷 Silicon Valley in the US
30.达到……目标 achieve / reach its goal
31.对人类是一个很大的威胁
a big threat to mankind
32.标志…..开始 mark the start of
33.展示中国高科技的成功
showcase China’s hi-tech successes
34.导致了科学技术的几项突破 lead to several breakthroughs in science and technology
35.背上长着人耳的小老鼠 a small mouse with a human ear grown on its back
36.贮存人体器官 restore human organs
37.最新成就 red hot achievements
38.充满伟大成就
be filled with great achievements
39.呈现出科技发展的繁荣景象enjoy a boom in scientific and technological development
40.提出计划 put forward a plan
41.科教举国rejuvenate the nation by relying on science and education
42.取得突破性进展make many breakthroughs
43.探索太空 explore space
44. 中国航天局 the Chinese Space Agency
45.长征系列运载火箭 Long March rocket series
46.第一次载人太空飞行
the first manned space flight
47.破解生命之谜solve the mysteries of life
48.目的在发展农业aim at improving agriculture
49.人体检测国际研究项目
the international human genome project
50.世界一流be among the world’s best
51.中国与计算机一见钟情It seems to be love at first byte for China and computers
52.高速宽带网
a new high-speed broadband network
53.创建了智能机器人
build the nation’s first humanoid robot
54.清晰陈述你的观点state your opinion clearly
55.用强有力的论点为之辩护
support it with strong arguments
56.最杰出的新突破
the most outstanding new breakthroughs
57.并非所有的都 not all
58.得满分 get full marks
59.免费七日欧洲双人游
a 7-day free trip to Europe for two
60.美国宪法
the Constitution of the United States of America
高二英语新教材Unit 12 some phrases
1.大洋中最深的地方the deepest point in the ocean
2.航天飞机 a space shuttle
3.写出概况 make a sketch of
4.我们能战胜所有疾病的时候
a time when we can beat all diseases
5.找到使我们永远年轻的方法
find a way to keep us young forever
6.来自外部太空的生物creatures from outer space
7.不知道 have no idea
8.爱上了戏剧 develop his live for the theatre
9.谋生 make a living
10.提醒某人某事 remind sb of sth
11.把……向前推进一步take… one step further
12.奠定了现代科幻小说的基础
lay the foundation of modern science fiction
13.很久之后才…… long before
14.着手做 set out to do
15.在努力求生时 in their efforts to survive
16.发现自己来到了怪物的表面上
find themselves on the surface of the monster
17.结果是潜艇 turn out to be a submarine
18.越洋航行on a voyage across the oceans
19.可以看见水底世界
give a view of the underwater world
20.穿着潜水服dressed in diving suits
21.发现自己被包围
find themselves surrounded by
22.所有的才在蓝色的海水中随波起伏,慢慢移动all waving and moving slowly in the blue waters
23.从……开始 begin with
24.进行冒险 go on this adventure
25.通过煤层和大理石层
pass through the layers of coal and marble
26.穿过森林 go through forests
27.受到古老海洋生物的袭击
be attacked by ancient sea creatures
28.最后,终于 in the end
29.被卷进急流 be drawn into a fast stream
30.水下旅行 underwater travel
31.沸腾的河 a boiling river
32.被冰川撞击后 after hitting iceberg
33.开始了第一次航行 set out on its first voyage
34.沉入海底 sink to the bottom of the sea
35.成为……一例 become an example of
36.成为人们心中永久的痛
become a permanent pain in people’s hearts
37.过度工作 work too much
38.前总统 former president
39.对我祖父母的家心怀不轨
misbehave at may grandparent’s house
40.屏幕下端的字幕
subtitles at the bottom of the screen
41.被火车运送到目的地
be transported to the destination by train
42.多种情况下 in many cases
43.乘坐地铁 take the subway
44.整周超时工作 work overtime all week
45.穿着内裤当众行走
walk in public in your underpants
46.在没有指导的情况下摸索
look for a road without having a map
47.开始进行结智慧的探索
enter the search for wisdom
48.使人了解 throw light upon
49.许多卓越科学家的著作
the works of many brilliant scientists
50.开辟一条新路 pioneer a new way
51.吸引我的注意力 attract my attention
52.把自然界最深邃的奥秘展示给世人
unfold to the world the deepest mysteries of nature
53.人体结构 the structure of the human body
54.梦想 dream of
55.身高八尺 about eight feet in height
56.切碎 cut up
57.在十一月的一个夜晚on a night in November
587.烧光 burn out
59.把床上的帘子打开 open the curtain of the bed
60.选词 make a choice of the words
高二英语新教材Unit 13 some phrases
1.用……覆盖 cover with
2.把水和菜油倒入杯中
pour water and vegetable oil into a glass
3.把一支粉笔放入水中put a piece of chalk in water
4.把淡水装入杯子 fill one glass with fresh water
5.保护我们这个星球上的水protect the water on our planet
6.把杯子翻转 turn the glass upside down
7.提出 come up with
8.用这种方法使用水use water in this way
9.从中受益 benefit from
10.大约30亿年前 about three billion years ago
11.海洋生命丰富、多样，令人难以置信
marine life is incredibly rich and varied
12.范围从微生物一直到巨物ranges from the tiniest plankton all the way up to giants
13.水的化学结构 the chemical structure of water
14.赋予水以独特的特性
give water it unique properties
15.由两个氢原子和一个氧原子组成be made up if two hydrogen atoms and one oxygen atom
16.一种极性微粒 a polar molecule
17.分解固体和气体
break down both solids and gases
18.为其他生物所利用become available to other living creatures
19.水在室温下是液体
water is a liquid at room temperature
20.有一个相对高的结冰点
have a relatively high freezing point
21.与纯水混合 mix with pure water
22.一球上大洋的含盐量
the salinity of the earth’s oceans
23.每立米用公斤来衡量
be measured in kilograms per cubic metre
24.利用水的密度
take advantage of the density of water
25.能量 the amount of energy
26.把温度提高1℃ raise the temperature by one degree centigrade
27.释放出大量的热 give off a lot of heat
28.对温度的巨变和突变很敏感be sensitive to large and sudden changes in temperature
29.通过吸收和释放热量而保持稳定
keep steady by absorbing and giving off heat
30.给海洋中的生态系统增加能量
add energy to the marine ecosystems
31.没有任何东西像一滴水一样宝贵
nothing is as precious as a drop of rain
32.我们的未来取决于它our future depends on it
33.变成固体 turn into a solid
34.温度降到零度以下
the temperature drops below 0℃
35.被加热到100℃以上
when heated above 100℃
36.海洋中的生命大小各异l
ife in the oceans appears in different sizes
37.给……打电话 give sb a call
38.继续在该公司工作
continue working at this company
39.捉弄你 play a trick on sb
40.叫来警察 call in the police
41.海洋是地球上一切生物的发源地
the oceans are the source of life on earth
42.河流与大洋交汇where a river meets the ocean
43.在河口相混合mix together in an estuary
44.制造出一种独特的环境
create a unique environment
45.陆地与海洋的衔接地带
a zone between the land and the sea
46.河口是自然界中幼小生命的繁衍地
estuaries are great places for nature’s young ones
47.三用面支很多危险
without having to face many of the dangers
48.生物的密集度 the density of living creatures
49.海洋哺乳动物 marine mammals
50.吸收营养物质和污染物
absorb nutrients and pollutants
51.对环境污染很敏感
be sensitive to environmental pollution
52.保护动物免遭风暴和洪水
protect animals and plants
53.为人类提供休闲和教育的场所provide both recreation and education for human beings
54.在海滩上嬉戏 have fun on the beach
55.为研究各种生命提供情报无尽的机会
have endless opportunities to study a variety of life
56.通过旅游业和渔业为经济做贡献contribute to the economy through tourism and fishing
57.那么多的物种生活在河口
so many species live in estuaries
58.按事情发生的顺序解释每一步
explain each step in the order it happens
59.给出新词的定义 define new words
60.把……与……相比 compare … to
高二英语新教材Unit 14 some phrases
1.获得诺贝尔和平奖receive the Nobel Peace Price
2.把……投入监狱 put … into prison
3.自由战士 freedom fighter
4.动摇国家的基
shake the foundations of the nation
5.根据肤色判断 judge by the color of their skin
6.根据性格的内涵 by the content of their character
7.像兄弟姐妹般一起散步
walk together as brothers and sisters
8.当农民 work as a farmer
9.与……交朋友 make friends with
10.禁止人们帮助逃跑的奴隶
forbid people to help run away slaves
11.加入行动小组 join an action group
12.在内战中参战 fight in the Civil War
13.积极从事女权运动
be active in the women’s rights movement
14.黑人女孩不能嫁给白人男孩
black girls could not marry white boys
15.民权法案 the Civil Rights Act
16.给…发表演说 give a speech to sb
17.向华盛顿特区进军march on Washington D.C.
18.使他们闻名全世界
make him famous all over the world
19.黑人受到不平等的待遇
blacks are not treated as equal citizens
20.奴隶制在美国结束 slavery ended in the USA
21.为黑人的政治权利而战
fight for political rights for black people
22.为…树立榜样
set an example to sb
23.应当像其他人一样受到尊敬
be treated with respect in the same way as other people
24.获得奖学金 win a scholarship
25.给他以…机会 give him the chance to do
26.可以如愿的自由生活
be free to live, and work as they wished
27.要求社会改革 demand changes in society
28.通过和平手段达到目的
achieve that goal by peaceful actions
29.在白人区坐下来
sit down in the White-only section
30.拒绝为白人让座
refuse to stand up for a white man
31. 领导公交公司进行联合抵制
lead a boycott of the bus company
32.把黑人和白人分开是错误的
it was wrong to separate blacks from whites
33.金打赢了这场官司使他受到全国人民的重视
Winning this case gave King national attention
34.领导反种族歧视的非暴力游行
lead many non-violent demonstrations against racial discrimination
35.黑人就粘机会很少few jobs for blacks
36.激励各种族人为平等而战
inspire people of all races to fight for equality
37.有选举权 have the right to vote
38.随意表达我们想说的
be free to say whatever we want
39.任何的时候 of all times
40.选择自由信仰的权利
in their choice of which god to believe in
41.法国大革命 the French Revolution
42.美独立战争
the American War of Independence
43.国际女权运动
the international movements for the rights of women
44.在现代 in modern times
45.同偏见作斗争 fight against prejudice
46.有共同之处 have in common
47.老百姓 he common people
48.要求受尊重
ask to be treated with respect
49.不理会种族、宗教和性别
regardless of race , religion or sex
50.为他们自己代言
have a voice to speak for themselves
51.要求黑人有更好的居住条件
want better housing conditions for black people
52.不止一个家庭 more than one family
53.提出新观点的好方法
a good way to come up with new ideas
54.使读者吃惊 surprise your readers
55.较开放地谈论话题
approach every topic with an open mind
56.作为平等公民对待
treat as equal citizens
57.被警察逮捕
be arrested by the police
58.生来就是奴隶 be born as a slave
59.携手 join hands
60.乍一be amazed by
SBII Unit 15 some phrases
1.提供一张免费机票 offer a free air ticket
2.沿途停靠5次 make five stops along the way
3.立刻对它进行调查 look into it immediately
4.第一次 for the first time
5.不时地 every now and then
6.有旅游的强烈愿望 get the itch to travel
7.如果你感到有迫切的愿望想打点行装
should you feel the urge to pack you bags
8.巴西第二大城市 Brazil’s second largest city
9.大西洋沿岸along the coast of the Atlantic Ocean
10.使你看到 give you a glimpse of
11.他们以心胸开阔和友善而闻名
be known for their big hearts and friendliness
12.该市的历史文化中心
the city’s cultural and historical heart
13.挨着商店的舞厅耸立着
stand next to stores and dance halls
14.步行穿过商业区等于上了一堂历史课
a walk through downtown Rio is a history lesson
15.里约任何地方离海滩都不远the beach is n ever far away in Rio
16.从商业区乘公共汽车只有几站路
only a few bus stops from downtown
17.作为海洋公主而闻名
be known as the “princess of the sea”
18.庆百岁生日celebrate its one hundredth birthday
19.厌烦 get tired of
20.在大街上 on the main avenue
21.很少的游客会失望地离开里约
few visitors leave Rio felling disappointed
22.旅游旺季 the biggest tourism season
23.为期四天的节日 a four-day festival
24.尝试去……旅游 try a visit to
25.位于奥地利南部 located in southern Austria
26.是滑雪者的天堂 a paradise for skiers
27.世界级滑雪胜地 a world-class ski resort
28.参加速滑比赛 compete in the downhill race
29.没有必要担心there is no need to worry
30.广泛多样的娱乐
a wide variety of entertainment
31. 一饱眼福 a feast for the eyes
32.如果你有足够的精力
should you have enough energy left
33.到游泳池里泡一泡take a dip in the pool
34.在体育馆里活动 work out at the gym
35.在山村被扶养大
be brought up in a mountainous village
36.在城里经营小公司run a small company in a city
37.去锻炼 take exercises
38.我们在闲聊 we are chatting
39.吸引世界各地的游客
attract visitors from all over the world
40.到遥远的地方去旅行
go on a trip to a far-away destination
41.避免最普通的问题
avoid some of the most common problems
42.节约钱的好办法
a good way to save money
43.使预算持续更久
make our budget last longer
44.找到问题的答案
find answers to your questions
45.在两者之间选择
choose between different alternatives
46.喜欢自己安排
prefer to make their own arrangements
47.信用卡 credit cards
48.需要带些现金 need to bring some cash
49.把钱和护照放在安全地方
keep your passport and money in a safe place
50.所有重要文件备副本
make photocopies of all important documents
51.买外币 buy foreign currency
52.如果可能，轻装旅行 travel light if possible
53.兑换钱 exchange money
54.有经验的旅行者 seasoned travelers
55.留在家里 leave at home
56.在我们旅行的第一天
on the first day of our trip
57.旅行日记 a travel diary
58.做笔记 make notes of
59.为……留地方 leave room for
60.对……感到惊奇 be amazed by
高二英语新教材Unit 16 some phrases
1. 被拒绝入美国
be refused entry into the USA
2.与……有关 connected with
3.处理过去的麻烦事 deal with its troubled past
4.土著美洲人 the Native Americans
5.被欧洲殖民者驱逐
be driven off their land by European settlers
6.失业的艰辛 the hardships of unemployment
7.战后国内的动乱civil unrest in the post-war years
8.大萧条 the Great Depression
9.伤口愈合很慢 be slow to heal
10.伤痕很深 the scars run deep
11.远远落后 far behind
12.从过去的黑暗中走出come out of its dark past
13.从毁坏中恢复过来
recover from the destruction
14.非裔美国人社区
African-American community
15.接近一半的人口 nearly half the population
16.种族隔离剥夺了他们许多权利
the segregation take away many of their rights
17.目的是aim at
18.城市目击了一连串的冲突
the city saw a series of fierce fights
19.为悼念 in honour of
20.没有白费 be no in vain
21.崭新的黎明似乎就要来临
a new dawn seem to arrive
22.为……而骄傲be proud of
23.奥运会的主办者the host of the Olympic Games
24.骄傲地展示它的新形象
be proud to display its new image
25.繁荣的商业中心 a booming business centre
26.新南部的代表
be representative of the new South
27.下决心be determined to do
28.与老同学保持联系
keep in touch with his former classmates
29.对钱很贪婪be greedy for money
30.总工程师 the chief engineer
31.吉尼斯世界纪录大全
the Guinness Book of World Records
32.不同意他的观点 disagree with him
33.解决问题 solve the problem
34.出售 go on sale
35.通过采集草根生存 live by gathering roots
36.大规模存在 exist in huge numbers
37.长到肩高 grow to a shoulder-height of
38.被除数用制成项链
be used to make necklace
39.从1830年起from about 1830 onwards
40.向西迁移 move westwards
41.被迫做 be forced to do
42.抵制做 resist doing
43.与土著首领达成协议
make agreements with Native American chiefs
44.用这种种方法 in this way
45.在平原上修建铁路
build railways across the plains
46.切掉皮cut off the skins
47.改变平原上的野生动物
change the while wildlife of the plains
48.掉到地上 fall on the ground
49.靠……过活 live on
50.消失 die out
51.相反 in turn
52.对 ……有影响have an effect on
53.整个平原的野生动物链
the whole wildlife chain of the plains
54.放弃 give up
55.以……结束 end up with
56.利用野牛 make use of the bison
57.列出相似与区别
list similarities and differences
58.一点一点地 point by point
59.补上 make up
60.一件事，另一件事 one thing, the other
Unit 17 some phrases
1.试图帮助 try to help
2.像孩子那样对待我 treat me as if I were a child
3.获小科学家奖win an award for young scientists
4.到处走动 get up to move around
5.很明显 it becomes obvious that…
6.没有用腿的能力without the ability to use her legs
7.腰部以下没有知觉has no feeling below the waist
8.在省科学展览中获奖
receive an award at her province’s science fair
9.给每个人以…的机
give everybody a chance to do
10.身体的残疾 physical disabilities
11.开发他们的潜能 develop their potential
12.过丰富多彩的生活 live a rich life
13.为社会做贡献 make a contribution to society
14.办所特教学院launch a special education college
15.有天赋的残疾学生 gifted disabled students
16.没有残疾 have no disability
17.不但…,而且 not only…, but also…
18.帮助残疾人 assist disabled people
19.合作以达到他们的生活目标
cooperate to reach their goals in life
20.在社会上起有价值的作用
play a valuable role within society
21.鼓励某人做 inspire sb to do
22.实现他们的梦想 realize their dreams
23.克服困难 overcome difficulties
24.过有意义，有作为的生活
live a meaningful and productive life
25.大约1/3的文章
about one-third of the articles
26.第一个弱视中国人
the first visually impaired Chinese
27.学会忍受我的身体 live with my body
28.适应了自己的生活方式 adjust my way of life
29.习惯于 get used to sth/doing
30.不再 no longer
31.提供指导 offer guidance
32.同情残疾人 have sympathy for the disabled
33.在绘画方面有天分 be gifted in painting
34.阻止……做 prevent from doing
35.过正常的生活 live a normal life
36.照看自己 take care of herself
37.同她交朋友make friends with her
38.收到那个女孩的来信
receive the letter from the girl
39.出席国际会议attend an international meeting
40.就……道歉 apologize for
41.智力残疾的运动员mentally disabled athletes
42.参加特奥会
take part in the Special Olympics
43.团结和友谊的强烈氛围
a strong sense of unity and friendship
44.看起来好像It seems as if
45.第一个冲过终点线
the first one across the finish line
46.尽你所能做得好about being the best you can be
47.多方面的斗士 fighters in more than one way
48.给…以尊敬和尊treat…with dignity and respect
49.改善生活质量 improve the quality of life
50.参加物奥会
participate in the Special Olympics
51.获得更大的自信心
gain greater self-confidence
52.参加三项竞赛 compete in three events
53.在世界范围内普遍 spread across the world
54.属于 belong to
55.有同等接近…… have equal access to
56.进行调研 conduct a survey of
57.经常，有时 at times
58.保持积极的态度 keep a positive attitude
59.完成任务 complete a task
60.许多障碍 many obstacles
Unit 18 some phrases
1. 扔掉throw away
2.吃点心 have a snack
3.发电 make electricity
4.厌烦 be tired of
5.沉重的笔记本电脑a heavy laptop computer
6.不及眼镜重weigh less than a pair of glasses
7.放出空气let the air out
8.给某人专利 give sb a patent
9.纵观历史 throughout history
10.提出观点 come up with ideas
11.有很多共同之处have much in common
12.有很高的智商have a high IQ
13. 通过思考 by thinking about
14.练习做practise doing
15.框外思维think outside the box
16.考虑那些有创造性的解决办法allow for creative solutions
17.为某人提供provide sb with
18.被困住 get stuck
19.摆脱掉旧的思维模式break away from old thought patterns
20.用尽可能多的方in as many ways as possible
21.仍然不可见remain invisible
22.正如……一样 as with
23.一系列不同的尝a series of different attempts
24.与……相连be connected to
25.了解到 be aware of
26.反复试验的结
a long process of trial and error
27.强迫某人做 force sb to do
28.试用思维策略
try using the thinking strategies
29.努力避免失败try to avoid failure
30.相对论Theory of Relativity
31.手工地 by hand
32.把……换成 exchange … for
33.被难题困住 get stuck in a difficult problem
34.台式电脑 a desktop computer
35.掌上电脑 a palmtop computer
36.中国古代四大发明
the four ancient Chinese inventions
37.在音乐方面展示才华show his talent for music
38.伟大的卡通制片人a great cartoon film maker
39.著名的物理教授
a famous professor of physics
40.著名的喜剧作家 a famous comedian
41.圣经中的人物 a figure in the Bible
42.假如给我三天光明Three days to see
43.越……越 the more…, the more…
44.数码相机 digital camera
45.据说我们生活在信息时代
we’re said to be living in the Information Age.
46.处理，对付 do with
47.与……相似 be similar to
48.储存信息 keep information in its memory
49.明显不同于 be clearly different from
50.毕竟，终究 after all
51.既然 now that
52.快速地 at such a high space
53.将来 in the future
54.科学的暗喻 scientific metaphors
55.把……比作 compare… to…
56.被用来学英语 be sued to study English
57.犯错误 make mistakes
58.知道，追踪 keep track of
59.从中学习 learn from
60.把……翻译
SBII Unit 19 some phrases
1. 发生 take place
1. 偿还债务 pay back the debt
2. 偿清 pay off
3. 在现代 in modern times
4. 救命 save one’s life
5. 做出重要决定
make an important decision
6. 你当权时有最坏的敌人
had your worst enemy in your power
7. 娶某人 marry sb.
8. 与…… 结婚 be married to
9. 就我所知 as far as I know
10. 开始干 go about
11. 玩一个残酷的游戏 play a cruel game
12. 放弃 give up
13. 最后 in the end
14. 对表示怜悯 have mercy on
15. 答应割一磅肉
promise to take my pound of flesh
16. 没人再相信你的法律
no one will trust your laws any more
17. 尽力与…… 争论是无用的
it’s useless trying to argue with
18. 你还是做…的好
you might as well do
19. 付……款 pay… for
20. 希望 hope for
21. 请坐 please be seated
22. 使……就坐 seat sb/ oneself
23. 与…… 的协议 your agreement with
24. 根据 according to
25. 撕毁文件 tear up the paper
26. 对天发誓 swear to heaven
27. 把胸部露出来offer up your breast
28. 准备做这事 prepare to do the deed
29. 称肉的重量 weigh the flesh
30. 流血而死 bleed to death
31. 准备好 be ready for
32. 拿整个心脏来还债
pay him back with all my heart
33. 拥抱你一下 take you in my arms
34. 宣判 pass your judgement
35. 喜欢做 prefer to do
36. 面对铁石心肠的敌人
face an enemy with a heart of stone
37. 失去了所有航海的船只
lost all his ships at sea
38. 准时，按时 on time
39. 像往常那样 as usual
40. 出海 be at sea
41. 一个条件 on one condition
42. 当笑话对待 treat … as a joke
43. 签协议 sign the agreement
44. 我收到你的信 your letter reached me
45. 研究法律书籍study many law books
46. 站在我的立场 stand in my place
47. 从来不知如此年轻却有如此聪明的头脑 never knew so young a body with so wise a head
48. 你会得到公正 you shall get justice
49. 剥夺 take away from
50. 任由…… 摆布 be at the mercy of
51. 跪下 go down on one’s knees
52. 讫求某人的怜悯 beg… for mercy
53. 值得人发慈悲
be worthy of our kindness
54. 像生命一样宝贵 as dear to me as life
55. 死后把这钱留给女儿 leave the money upon his death to his daughter
56. 来找他帮忙 come to him for help
57. 醒来 wake up
58. 讲出实情 tell the truth
59. 把孩子切成两半
cut the baby in half
高二英语新教材Unit 20 some phrases
1.石器时代 Stone Age
2.青铜器时代 Bronze Age
3.参观地方博物馆visit a local museum
4.很难找出来 be difficult to find out
5.度假 go on a holiday
6.对……好奇 be curious about
7.随葬 be buried with
8.追溯到…… date back to
9.下葬时左侧躺着be buried in his left side
10.在中欧度过他的青年时代
spend his youth in central Europe
11.骨针 a bone pin
12.或许来自 may have been from
13.两个金耳环 two gold earrings
14.两个陶罐 two pots made of clay
15.在他们旁边有一个垫东西的石头
next to them lay a cushion stone
16.赖以生存 need to survive
17.各种各样的理由 a variety of reasons
18.倾向于认为 tend to believe
19.巨石王 the King of Stonehenge
20.皮衣 a leather coat
21.重几乎20吨 weigh approximately 20 tons
22.平均 on average
23.还不知道这些石头如何运来的
It’s not yet l\known how these were conveyed
24.经过……的距离 over a distance of
25.很可能 it is possible that
26.与……石头有关 link to the stones
27.参与策划 have a hand in planning
28.竖起巨石 pull up the stones
29.欧洲大陆 have a hand in planning
30.就技术发展而言
in terms of technical development
31.用石头制成的 be made of stone
32.用铜和青铜制造工具
make tools of copper and bronze
33.人们认为…… it is thought that
34.武装冲突 armed conflict
35.通过学习贸易和文化交流
through trade and cultural links
36.在当地人的眼中
in the eyes of local people
37.远到西班牙 place as distant as Spain
38.金银珠宝 the gold jewellery
39.知道 have knowledge about
40.同欧洲贸易 trade with Europe
41.又圆又深的碗 a deep round bowl
42.穿着黑衣服 be dressed in black
43.把画钉到墙上
pin the picture to the wall
44.在苏格兰长大grow up in Scotland
45.闻名于中国
become famous all over China
46.建筑工人 construction workers
47.在泥土中发现了象牙和巨石
find ivory and jade in mud
48.（也）不有大量的象牙
as well as a large quantity of ivory
49.充当 serve as
50.古代 in ancient times
51.提醒某人某物 remind sb of sth
52.与……有贸易交流have trade link with
53.据信 It is believed that
54.挖出 dig up
55.热情接待 warmly receive them
56.属于 belong to
57.占地……面积 cover a vast area of
58.神秘的宫殿 the mysterious palaces
59.国王的坟墓 tombs of kings
60.弄清楚 make clear语法复习专题（13）
Unit13 状语从句
一、考点聚焦
1、时间状语从句
（1）as、when、while用法一览表。
类别 作 用 例 句
as as表示“当……的时候”，往往和when/ while通用，但它着重强调主句与从句的动作或事情同时或几乎同时发生。 She came up as I was cooking.(同时)The runners started as the gun went off.(几乎同时)
when (at or during the time that )既可以表示在某一点的时候，又可表示在某一段时间内，主句与从句的动作或事情可以同时发生也可以先后发生。 It was raining when we arrived.(指时间点)When we were at school, we went to the library every day.(在一段时间内)
while while意思是“当……的时候”或“在某一段时间里”。主句中的动作或事情在从句中的动作或事情的进展过程中发生，从句中的动词一般要用延续性动词。在when表示a period of time时，两者可以互换。 Please don’t talk so loud while others are working.He fell asleep while/when reading. Strike while the iron is hot.(用as或when不可，这里的while意思是“趁……”)
（2）引导时间状语从句的连接词除上述外还有：
①till, not … until …, until, before, since
Don’t get off the bus until it has stopped.
He waited for his father until(till)it was twelve o’clock.
It will be five years before he returns from England.
②hardly / scarcely … when, no sooner … than, as soon as once
表示“一……就”
As soon as I have finished it , I’ll give yu a call.
Once you show any fear, he will attack you.
We had hardly got / Hardly had we got into the country when it
began to rain.
No sooner had he arrived / He had no sooner arrived than she started complaining.
③directly, immediately, the moment, the minute that… 一……就
He made for the door directly he heard the knock.
④each time, every time, by the time
Each time he came to my city, he would call on me.
注意：表示未来情况，主句用将来时，从句用现在时。
2、让步状语从句
（1）although与though可以引导让步状语从句，不能与but连用，但可以与yet连用。
Although they are poor,(yet)they are warm-hearted.
（2）even if或even though引导让步状语从句，表示“即使”，“纵然”，用来使人注意下文所强调内容的性质。
I’ll get there even if(though)I have to sell my house to get enough money to go by air.
（3）no matter后接上who、what、where、how等疑问词，也可以在这类疑问词后面加上ever构成whoever、whatever、wherever、however等。
Don’t trust him, no matter what / whatever he says.
Whoever breaks the law will be published.
No matter how hard the work is, you’d better try to do it well.
（4）as也可以引导让步状语从句。要用倒装。
Child as(though)he is, he knows a lot.
Much as I like it, I won’t buy.
Try as he would, he couldn’t lift the heavy box.
3、原因状语从句：because, for, as, since, now that
（1）表示不知道的原因时用because,即说话人认为听话人不知道，因此because从句是全句最重要的部分，通常它被置于主句之后。
You want to know why I’m leaving I’m leaving because I’m full.
for虽然表示不知道的原因，但其语气较because要弱得多，是可说可不说的话，它只能置于主句之后，这时，for是并列连词。如果不是因果关系，而是对前面主句的内容加以解释或推断时，只能用for。如：It’s morning now, for the birds are singing.（很显然，鸟叫不可能是“现在已是早上”的原因。）
（2）表示已经知道的原因时用as或since,即某种原因在说话人看来已经很明显，或已为听话人所熟悉，因此它是句中不很重要的部分。since要比as正式一些，它们通常被置于语句之前，但有时却相反。
Seeing all of the children already seated, he said,“Since everyone is here, let’s start.”
(3)下列情况下只能使用because:
①在回答why的问句时；
②在用于强调句型时；
③被not所否定时。
4、地点状语从句：where, wherever
Make a mark wherever you have any questions.
We will go where the Party directs us.
5、目的状语从句：that, so that, in order that
注意：目的状语从句的谓语动词常与情态动词连用，否则可能是结果状语从句。不可置于句首。
6、结果状语从句：that, so that, so … that, such … that …
注意：so + 形容词/副词 + that从句；such +　名词 + that从句。
7、方式状语从句：as, as if(though)
I’ll do as I am told to.
It looks as if it is going to rain.
8、比较状语从句：than, as
9、条件状语从句：if, unless, so (as) long as, in case, once, a far as, on condition that.
注意if与unless的区别：不能用and连接两个unless从句，即不能有… unless …,and unless … 。但if … not and if … not却不受此限。
You won’t lose your weight unless you eat less and unless you exercise more.(×)
但可以说 … unless you eat less and exercise more.
10、注意状语从句中从句的省略现象
（1）连接词 + 过去分词
Don’t speak until spoken to.
Pressure can be incrased when needed.
Unless repaired, the washing machine is no use.
（2）连词 +　现在分词
Look out while crossing the street.
（3）连词 + 形容词/其他
常见的有it necessary、if possible、when necessary、if any等。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ____________.
(NMET 2000)
A.as last B.in case C.once again D.in time
解析：答案为B。句意为“带些钱以防万一”，只能选择in case。引导的条件状语从句，后面省略了I should need it。
2. The WTO can’t live up to its name _________ it doesn’t include a country that is home to one fifth of mankind.（NMET 2000）
A.as long as B.while C.if D.even though
解析：答案为C。本题考查状语从句的用法。句意为“假如世贸组织不包括占世界人口五分之一的中国的话，那它就名不副实”。as long as语气过于强烈，while和even though不符合句意。
3、Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up_________I could answer the phone.(NMET 2000)
A.as B.since C.before D.until
解析：答案为C。题意为：半夜里有人打来电话，我没来得及就挂了。but暗示在接话前就挂了。
4.You should try to get a good night’s sleep much work you have to do.
A. however B. no matter C. although D. whatever
解析：答案为A。此题考查连词用法，依据结构However +形/副+主语+谓语。故选A。
5.He speaks English well indeed, but of course not a native speaker.
A. as fluent as B. more fluent than
C. so fluently as D. much fluently than
解析：答案为C。此题考查So adj./adv. As和as adj. / adv. As 用法，前者主要用于否定句，在这里要修饰谓语动词，故选C。
*4*听 力
【考点聚焦】
高考英语听力测试的特点及应试技巧
２００２年听力第一次在全国范围（个别省例外）以３０分计入总分。听力测试安排在英语考试的开头，所以听力测试的好坏不但影响着听力题本身的得分，而且还对后面的解题产生一定的心理影响，故做好听力测试题，首战告捷，保持最佳竞技状态，是获得英语高分的前提和关键。
一、高考听力测试题的特点
1.测试目的和要求
高考听力测试以语篇（对话或独白）为测试载体，在语言使用的场景中测试学生使用语音、语法、词汇知识的能力，主要是考查考生对所听信息的正确理解能力和快速反应能力。听力测试要点包括：1）理解主旨和大意。2）获取事实性的具体信息，如时间、地点、人物等。3）简单推断谈话背景、人物关系等。4）理解说话人的意图、观点或态度。一般来讲， 说话人总会有说话的意图，或提出或回答问题，阐述自己的观点，表明自己的态度。有时，说话者的意图或观点被明确说出，有时则隐含在语篇的字里行间，需要我们去揣摩、推测。
2.测试的形式和难度
高考英语听力测试约需20分钟左右，共20个小题，计分30分。设问全部是特殊疑问句，几乎涵盖了所有的疑问类型，如：what , who, when, where, why, how, what time, how many,how much, how long, how old, how soon, how often 等，选项为“3选1”。听力测试共分两节：第一节是听五段简短对话，每段对话后仅有一个选择题，每段对话仅读一遍。主要考查考生对语音、数字（时间、日期、号码、价格等）、字母、句子结构及句意等的快速反应能力和理解能力。
第二节包括5段对话或独白，共15小题，每段材料播放两遍。主要考查考生对较长对话或短文的整体理解和把握能力，及对细节的归纳综合能力和判断推理能力等。
在听力部分的两节中，第一节的材料内容较少，难度较小；第二节内容较多，难度稍大。录音文字材料的难度略低于阅读材料，全部采用口语体。听力材料的读速接近于英美人的正常语速。2004年的全国高考听力题与2000年的相比较，2004年的听力测试的语速明显加快，材料的长度也有所增加。这是一个值得引起我们注意的发展趋势。
3.测试的话题和材料
高考听力材料的选择非常重视语言的真实性原则，语言材料一般来源于实际生活，涉及到现实生活的方方面面，如日常生活、文化教育、传说、时事、人物、科普等。对话一般围绕一个日常生活的话题展开。如：购物、买票、道别、感谢、打电话、约会、偏爱、祝愿和祝贺、提供帮助、请求、问路、看病、求救等。
二、高考听力测试的应试技巧
1.培养良好心态
听力测试题不同于其它题型，不可能像其它书面题型一样遇到不明白的地方可以回过头来看前面的材料或停下来自由地思考一下。听力测试的做题速度是由命题人统一掌握的，录音材料瞬息即逝，无“回听”的机会或自由思考的余地。考生临场心态对听力成绩有着极大的影响。考生必须培养良好的心态。
1）消除紧张心理。听力测试时，要做到心情平静，心态放松，精力集中。如果感到测试前心情比较紧张，做几次深呼吸，可有效缓解紧张情绪。
2）克服急躁心理。有些同学在听力测试时，不是听材料大意，而是专注于听个别单词。有个别词没听懂，往往停下来去思索，随即产生急躁焦虑心理，头脑一片空白，等回过神来时，录音早已放完。因此要学会顾全大局，局部放弃而取整体，并借助“精神胜利法”给自已释压减负。
2.学会预测话题
考生可以根据每个小题的问题及选项的提示来预测和推测录音材料的内容。从而做到心中有数，提前做好心理准备，获得主动。
3.合理分配注意力
科学合理地分配注意力，可以有效地提高听力测试成绩。掌握下列技巧：
1）学会听前抢读；2）学会边听边记；3）学会听关键词。
4.拓宽背景知识
背景知识也是影响听力效果的一个重要因素。因为语言是一种工具，是知识和文化的载体，所以听力材料必定涉及科普知识和社会文化知识。考生的百科知识越广博，越有助于对听力材料的理解。广泛地阅读和收集各种信息，不但有助于扩大知识面，也有益于听力成绩的提高。
5.熟悉交际用语
听力考试中常出现Where does the conversation take place What is the man’s profession , 之类的问题，考生要通过对话的具体情节和背景判断对话发生的地点、人物职业、人物关系等。熟悉特定的场景用语和关键词，这一点很重要。记住下面一些常用的场景用语。
餐馆（restaurant）用语：menu, bill, order, tip, hamburger, sandwich, soup,dish, beer,
softdrink等; 医院（hospital）用语:take medicine, temperature, pill , headache, fever, blood pressure 等; 宾馆（hotel）用语:luggage, single room, double room., room number 等;邮局（post office）用语: mail, deliver, stamp envelope, telegram等;机场（airport）用语:flight, take off, land, luggage 等;车站（railway station）用语: round trip, single trip, sleeping car等；商店（shop）用语: on sale, size, color, price, change等；学校（school）用语: professor, exam, course, dining hall, playground 等。
6.科学判断推理
听力测试对考生的判断推理能力提出了一定要求。要求考生把握整体内容，概括总结对话的主旨和大意；要求考生根据听力内容或背景效果，推测相关的具体内容，如：时间、地点、身份、人物关系等；要求考生在理解大意的基础上推测说话人的意图、观点和态度等。在判断推理的过程中要注意以下几个问题：
1）防止以偏概全；2）防止断章取义；3）防止似是而非
了解高考听力测试特点有助于更好地复习备考，但关键还是要打好基础，强化训练，自觉运用听力应试技巧，诚如此，听力方能从容应对。
【典例分析】
【例1】 理解主旨、要义（Know about the main idea）
任何一段对话或独白总是围绕一个主旨或者一个中心展开的。有时，主旨和要义比较明确；有时则会贯穿整个对话或独白，须我们自己去归纳、概括。
M: I hope it’ll be fine tomorrow. I’m going boating with Tom.
W: Oh, I think it will be fine.
M: Yes, I beard it on the radio.
What are the two speakers talking about
A.A fine boat. B.Their friend, Tom. C.The weather.
【例2】获取事实性的具体信息（Understand detailed factual information）
为了说明和解释主旨，对话或独白中需要具体信息，如时间、地点、人物等。这些信息是理解和把握对话主旨必不可少的内容，是听力考查的重点项目。
M: Well, I wondered why the office is still not open.
W: But it’s not yet eight. In fact, it’s only a quarter to eitht.
At what time does the office open
A.7:45 B. 8:15 C.8:00
【例3】 对背景、说话者之间的关系能作出简单的推断
（Inferring the background and relationship between the speakers）
对话或独白发生的背景及说话者之间的关系对话语的含义有举足轻重的作用。对说话背景、说话者之间关系的理解程度，在一定程度上可以体现一个人对口语的理解能力，因而是听力考查的重点项目。
常提的问题是：
What’s the relationship between the speakers
What can we learn from the dialogue
M: Excuse me, Madam.
W: Yes
M: Does this bus go to Zhongshan Road
W: Yes, I think so.
M: You’re welcome.
What is the relationship between the speakers
A.They are friends. B.They are strangers. C.They are brother and sister.
【例4】 理解说话者的意图、观点或态度
（Understand the speakers’ intention, views and attitude）
一般说来，说话者总会有其意图，或提出问题，回答问题，或阐述自己的想法或意见。这里很大程度上有助于对整个对话的理解。有时，说话者的意图或观点是明说出来的，有时则隐含在对话的句里行间，需听者去揣摩、推断。
What’s the most probable result of the conversation
What can we know about the man( woman)
W: Can I help you
M: Yes, I bought this radio two days ago, but I’m afraid it doesn’t work. I’d like to change it for another one.
W: Oh, dear. Yes, of course. Have you got your receipt
M: Yes, here it is.
W: Thank you. Just a moment, please.
What is the most probable result of the conversation
A. The man got this radio repaired.
B. The man got a new receipt.
C. The man got a new radio.
单项填空
【考点聚焦】
I.单元知识点综合测试
从高一到高三各单元重难考点聚焦，高考真题再现。
II.语法考点聚焦
1.名词
2.冠词
3.代词
4.形容词和副词
5.介词和连词
6.数词
7.动词时态和语态
8.情态动词
9.非谓语动词
10.虚拟语气
12.定语从句
13.状语从句
14.主谓一致和倒装
15.it的用法
一、NMET单项填空的命题特点
1.重英语语言的基础知识的考查及运用，知识点多，覆盖面广。内容上主要涵盖：语法知识，语法知识的情景交际，词汇知识，英语固定搭配和纯情景交际。
2.重点突出，强调考查动词的用法。以2002年春季高考为例，15道选择题中有6道考查动词，此类题主要集中在时态、语态、非谓语动词、动词词组、词义辩析及情态动词等方面。
3.突出语境的作用，注重语言交际功能的考查，从而达到考查语言运用能力的目的。自99年以来，NMET的考查重点、从语言形式转向语意，不仅考查语法规则、固定搭配等语言知识，更重要的是考查语言知识在具体语境中的运用，且设置的语境自然、巧妙、新颖，而且内容来源于生活，反映实际生活。
4.增加了综合化因素。部分题目综合考查多个语法项目或交叉考查语言知识，增加了试题的灵活性和难度。
二、NMET解题技巧及应试策略
1.把握题干所给语义信息，抓住关键词、句，提高语义题的得分率。题干中所提供的语义信息有时很明显，有时只能通过分析才能找到，考生务必仔细推敲。如：
（1）—Which of these two ties will you take
—I’ll take ______, to give me a change sometimes.
A. either B. neither C. all D. both
注意题中所给信息：“two”和”give me a change sometimes” 答案为D.
（2）I was really anxious about you . You _____ home without a word.
A. mustn’t leave B. shouldn’t have left
C. couldn’t have left D. needn’t leave
注意题中所给信息：“was”和“without a word”便不难读出“I”的责备之意。答案为B。
2.把握上下文的时间隐含
有时题干中没明确给出时间，而是隐含在上下文中，考生只有通过对题干所给信息的推断，才能选定正确的时态。如：
（1）—You’re drinking too much. —Only at home . No one _____ me but you.
A. is seeing B. had seen C. sees D. saw
题干信息有：“you are drinking”和“(I’m drinking) only at home.”故No one but you see me (now )。注意括号内补充信息。
(2) —How are the team playing
—They’re playing well ,but one of them _______ hurt .
A. got B. gets C. are D. were
题干隐含信息有：比赛正在进行，但有一人受伤。故选A。
3.排除思维定势的干扰
（1）Shanghai is larger than _____ city in India.
A. any other B. other C. all other D. any
“比较级+ than any other + 名词”这一结构为思维定势，而此题应考虑 “地理范畴”，故答案是D。
( 2 ) With everything she needed _______ , Mum left the marketplace .
A. to buy B. having bought C. buying D. bought
此题极易误选A或C。陷入思维定势，殊不知she needed为定语从句,后置，修饰everything。考查的是“with+名词/代词+分词”这一结构。故正确答案是D。
4.综合语法知识，注意句子结构
(1) _____ from the top of the mountain , the city looks beautiful .
A. Seen B. See C. Seeing D. To see
本题需综合运用语法知识，句子主语是the city , see与the city 之间存在“动宾”关系，故选用过去分词，如是“主谓”关系，则用现在分词。
(2) _____ something wrong with your composition .
A. There were B. There have had C. There seemed to be D. It seemed to
此题考查“There be …”句型结构，需注意be和后面的第一个主语在“数”上的一致，另要注意there be的变体形式，答案为C。
5.注意英汉表达习惯差异，排除母语干扰。
（1）—— Would you like another cup of coffee —— ______, I’ve had enough.
A. No, thanks B. Yes , please C. No, I won’t have it D. Yes, I won’t to
此题考查英语口语习惯表达，通常西方人士想接受对方盛情时用“yes, please ”或用“No, thanks”,表拒绝。故答案为A。
(2) ——Do you think I could borrow your dictionary —— _______.
A. Yes ,you may borrow B. Yes , you could C. Yes, help yourself D. Yes, go on
本题结合语境，A. D均不符表达习惯。B中could不妥，应用can, help yourself意为“随意取用”，故C为正确选项。
【典例分析】
【例1】—It’s getting late. I’m afraid I must be going now. —OK. .
A. however B. whatever C. whichever D. whenever
【解析】答案为D。考交际用语。客人要走，主人说OK，表明同意，下句应是“再见”，而不能说“别着急”（A），“再呆一会儿”（C）。至于慢走（B）属中国式英语，故选D项，See you 是再见的意思。
【例2】Let’s keep to the point or we any decisions.
A. will never reach B. have never reached
C. never reach D. never reached
【解析】答案为A。全句意为：咱们还是抓住要点（别跑题），否则就永远得不出结论（做不出决定），故选将来时。
【例3】The English play my students acted at the New Year’s party was a great success.
A. for which B. at which C. in which D. on which
【解析】答案为C。考定语从句。主句部分应是The English play at the New Year’s party was a great success.从句补全为独立句子应是my students acted in the play.所以应选in which,其余介词不妥。
【例4】When you come here for your holiday next time, don’t go to hotel; I can find you bed in my flat.
A. the; a B. the; 不填 C. a; the D. a; 不填
【解析】答案为A。本题考冠词。前一空表类别，填定冠词或不定冠词均可。后一空只能填不定冠词，表泛指。全句合理的解释是：下次你来度假时，别去旅店；我能在我的公寓为你找张床。故选A。
【例5】Roses need special care they can live through winter.
A. because B. so that C. even if D. as
【解析】答案为B。本题考状语从句。全句意为：玫瑰花需要特殊关心，以便过冬
（为了安全度过冬天）。其余选项不合逻辑。
【例6】—How about eight o’clock outside the cinema
— That me fine.
A. fits B. meets C. satisfies D. suits
【解析】答案为D。本题考交际用语和动词辨析。第一人提建议：八点钟在电影院外（见面）如何？第二人答：对我适合（表同意）。A项多指衣服合身。B项多指满足需求。C项指使满足、使满意。D项指适合某人或某情况。故D项最佳。
【例7】I like in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.
A. this B. that C. it D. one
【解析】答案为C。本句考惯用法及代词。Like是及物动词，需要宾语。此处“it”指模糊的情形或环境，无具体指代，其余项均不可。又如：I like it here(我喜欢这儿)。
【例8】Sarah, hurry up. I’m afraid you wouldn’t have time to before the party.
A. get changed B. get change C. get changing D. get to change
【解析】答案为A。本题考系表结构和非谓语动词。“get changed”是换衣服的意思，“changed”是过去分词作表语，就像“get dressed”(穿衣服)和“be seated”(就座)一样。
【例9】—Isn’t that Ann’s husband over there
—No, it be him I’m sure he doesn’t wear glasses.
A. can’t B. must not C. won’t D. may not
【解析】答案为A。本题考情态动词表推测。问：那边的难道不是Ann的丈夫吗？答：不是。不可能是他，我确信他不戴眼镜。
【例10】My mind wasn’t on what he was saying so I’m afraid I half of it.
A. was missing B. had missed C. will miss D. missed
【解析】答案为D。本句考时态和语境。全句意思是：我的心没在他说的话上，所以恐怕他说的话我有一半没听到。整个事情是过去的事，且是做过的事，所以选一般过去时D。
【例11】You are saying that everyone should be equal, and this is I disagree.
A. why B. where C. what D. how
【解析】答案为B。本题考宾语从句。Disagree是不及物动词，不缺宾语，也主不能填代词，排除C。其余三项均在引导名词性从句时作状语，但句意要求：这就是我不赞同的地方。缺地点状语，所以用B。
【例12】You can take anything from the shelf and read, but please the books when you’ve finished with them.
A. put on B. put down C. put back D. put off
【解析】答案为C。本题考短语动词。题意要求“把书放回去”，自然选“put back”。
【例13】Mary kept weighing herself to see how much she was getting.
A. heavier B. heavy C. the heavier D. the heaviest
【解析】答案为A。考比较级。句意为：Mary总是称自己的体重，看看（比过去）重了多少。要使用比较级，但不需要冠词。
【例14】—Susan, will you please go and empty that drawer
—
A. What for B. What is it C. How is it D. How come
【解析】答案为A。本题考省略及语境。语意为：—Susan，去把那个抽屉倒空好吗？—干吗？/为什么？答者不知为何要倒空抽屉，所以问为什么。故需选What for 它是What are you going to use the (empty)drawer for 的省略，近于why的用法。其余选项不合语境。
【例15】I don’t mind picking up your things from the store. , the walk will do me good.
A. Sooner or later B. Still C. In time D. Besides
【解析】答案为D。本题考副词及插入语，也考句子的承接关系。全句合理译为：我乐意（不介意）去商店取你的东西，再说/另外，走走路对我也有好处。所以要填Besides或What’s more之类的内容才与上文承接合理。
PAGE
8语法复习专题（3）
Unit3 代词
一、考点聚焦
代词分为九类：人称代词、物主代词、反身代词、相互代词、指示代词\疑问代词、连接代词、不定代词、关系代词。大多数代词具有名词和形容词的作用。
1、人称代词
（1）人称代词作主语用主格，作宾语、表语用宾格，但应注意以下4中情况：
①作主语的人称代词如果孤立地使用于无谓语动词的句子中，或在这种句子中与动词不定式连用，常用宾格。
—Does any of you know where Tom lives
—Me.
What! Me (to)play him at chess No!
②句子中代词作宾语或宾语补足语时，与所替代的名词在人称、数、格在意义上一般要保持前后一致。
The thief was thought to be he.(the thief是主格，故用he代替)
They took me to be her.他们误以为我是她。（me是宾格，故用her
替代）
③作表语人称代词一般用宾格，但在强调句型中，被强调部分代词的格不变。
I met her in the hospital.→It was her who I met in the hospital.
④在比较级的句子中than、as后用主格、宾格都可以。如：He is taller than me(I).但在下列句中有区别。
I like Jack as much as her.=I like both Jack and her.
I like Jack as much as she.=I like Jack and she likes him, too.
(2)两个以上的人称代词并列，其次序排列原则：
①在并列主语中，“I”总是放在最后，排列顺序为：二 三 一（人称）。宾格me也一样。
You ,she and I will be in charge of the case.
Mr.Zhang asked Li Hua and me to help him.
②第三人称，男女两性并用，男先女后。
He and she still don’t agree to the plan.
(3)几个人称代词的特殊用法。
①we/you(口语)常用来泛指一般人。
②she可以代表国家、船只、大地、月亮等。
The “Titanic”was the largest, wasn’t she
2.物主代词
（1）名词和形容词性物主代词各自的语法功能。
（2）one’s own…=...of one’s own句式的转换。
（3）某些固定结构中常用定冠词代替物主代词。
如： take sb. by the arm, be wounded in the leg.
3.反身代词
（1）反身代词的语法功能：宾语、表语、主语或宾语的同位语。
（2）反身代词和某些动词连有，构成固定短语。
enjoy oneself, feel oneself, make oneself at home, make oneself understood
（3）反身代词还可用于某些成语中。
for oneself为自己或独立地，of oneself自然地，自动地
by oneself独自地，in oneself本身性质，beside oneself喜怒哀愁至极
This problem gets a chapter to itself.这个问题占了一章（独有）。
Just between ourselves, I don’t think much of him.私下地说我并不怎么看重他。
They were discussing about it among themselves.（相互共同）
Left to himself he began to write.别人走后只留下他，他写了起来。
I’m very angry with myself.生自己的气。
4.相互代词（each other, one another）
相互代词无人称、数和格的区别，在句中作宾语。其所有格分别为each other’s 、one another’s ,作定语。
一般来说，each other指两者之间，one another指三者或三者以上之间，但现在区分已不明显。
5.指示代词（this, that , these, those, such, same）
指示代词具有形容词和代词两种词性，在句子中可以作定语、主语、宾语或表语等。
（1）指示代词this和that的区别。
①this (these)一般指时间或空间上较近的人或物；that(those)常指时间或空间较远的人或物。
This is my desk and that is yours.
In those days they could not go to school.
②this常指后面要讲到的事物，有启下的作用；that则指前面讲到过的事物，有承上的作用。
I want to tell you this:the English party will be held on Saturday
afternoon.
He hurt his leg yesterday. That’s why he didn’t come.
③为了避免重复，常用that或those代替前面已提过的名词。
The weather of Beijing is colder than that of Nanjing.
The ears of a rabbit are longer than those of a fox.
④this在电话用语中作自我介绍，that询问对方；this和that可以当副词用，意思相当于副词so。
（2）such和same的用法。
①such指“这样的”人或事，在句中作主语和定语。
Such was the story.
We have never seen such a tall building.
②same指“同样的”人或事，在句中作主语、表语、宾语和定语，same的前面要用定冠词the.
The same can be said of the other article.
另一篇文章也是同样的情况。（主语）
Whether he can do it or not,it is all the same to me.
他是否能做这事，对我来说都一样。（表语）
6、疑问代词（who,whom,which,what,whose）
疑问代词在句中作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
（1）who/what
①询问姓名或关系。——Who is he ——He is my brother./He is
Henry.询问职业或地位。——What is he？ ——He is a lawyer/teacher.
②What/who 作主语时，谓语动词的数取决于说话人的视点，可单数也可复数。
What is /are on the table
Who is/are in the library
(2)which与who、what
which表示在一定范围内，而who、what则无此限制。
I found two books on the desk.Which is yours
7.连接代词和关系代词
连接代词与疑问代词的形式相同，主要有who、whom、whose、what、which以及它们与ever合成的代词whoever、whomever、whatever、whichever等。它们用来引导主语从句，宾语从句和表语从句，即连接复合句中的主句和从句，并在从句中担任一定的句子成分，以连接代词引起的名词性从句前不能再加that.
关系代词是用来引导定语从句的代词，它们包括who、whom、whose、which、that等。这两类代词的用法详见“名词性从句”和“定语从句”部分。
8、不定代词
不定代词主要有：all、each、every、both、either、neither、one、none、little、few、many、much、other、another、some、any、no等。还有由some、any、no和every构成合成代词，不定代词具有名词和形容词的性质，并有可数和不可数之分，在句中可以作主语、表语、宾语、同位语、定语、状语等（every、no只能作定语）。下面介绍几组主要不定代词的用法与区别。
（1）some与any
一般用法：some、any可与单、复数可数名词及不可数名词连有。some一般用于肯定句，any多用于疑问、否定或条件句。
He has some Chinese paintings.(定语)
Some like sports,others like music.(主语)
Ask me if you have any questions.(定语)
Do you have any questions to ask (定语)
I don’t know any of the students.（宾语）
特殊用法：
①any用于肯定句表示“任何”的意思。
Any child can do that.（定语）
You may take any of them.（宾语）
②some用于单数可数名词前表示“某一”。
Smith went to some place in England.（定语）
③在期待对方回答yes 时，some用在表示请求或邀请的问句中。
Would you like some bananas （邀请）
Mum,could you give me some money (请求)
④some 用于否定句表示部分否定。
I don’t know some of the students.（宾语）
some和any在句中还可作状语，作副词。some意为“大约”相当于“about”,而any则表示程度，意为“稍，丝毫”。如：
There are some 300 workers on strike.
Do you feel any better today
(2)one,both,all
①one作定语、表语、主语或宾语，可以指人或物，表示“一个”的意思，其复数为ones,指人时，其所有格是one’s，反身代词是oneself.
One should try one’s best to serve the people.(主语、定语)
This is not the one I want.(表语)
one、ones可以代替上文提到过的名词，以免重复，one、ones前面分别可以用this、that、these、those或the、which等词修饰。如：
These books are more interesting than those ones.
Here are three pens.Which one is yours,this one or that one or the one in the pencil-box
②both用作定语、宾语、主语和同位语，可以指人或指物，表示“两者都”的意思。
This maths problem can be worked out in both ways.(定语)
Both of the boys are here.(主语)
We both are students.(同位语)
注意：both用于否定句，表示部分否定；表示完全否定时，用neither。如：Both of us are not teachers.我们俩并不都是教师。
Neither of us is a teacher. 我们俩都不是教师。
both不能放在the、these、those、my等之后，而应放在它们的前面。如：Both my parents like this film.
Both the /these boys are tall.
③all用作主语、表语、宾语、定语、同位语，指“全部的”、“整个的”，可与可数或不可数名词连用，除少数情况外，一般不与单数可数名词连用，与复数名词连用时，表示“所有的”、“全部的”，指三个或三个以上的人或物。
He gave me all the money.他把全部的钱给了我。
All the schools are flooded.所有的学校都被淹了。
I told him all about it. 我把一切都告诉了他。
That’s all for today.今天就在这儿。
They have all been to Xi’an.他们都去过西安。
注意：all 用于否定句，表示部分否定，完全否定用none。如：
Not all the ants go out for food.(or:All the ants don’t go out for food.)并不是所有的蚂蚁都出去寻找食物。
None of the money is mine.这钱一分也不是我的。
（3）many和much
many和much都表示“许多”，但many修饰或代替复数可数名词，much修饰或代替不可数名词。它们在句中可作主语、宾语、定语。much有时用作状语。
（4）few, little; a few, a little
few和little表示没有多少，含否定意义；而a few 和a little表示有一些，有几个，含肯定意义。另外，few、a few 修饰可数名词；little、a little修饰不可数名词。它们在句中常用作定语、主语和宾语。
（5）no和none
no=not any,表示“没有”，用来修饰可数名词或不可数名词，通常作定语，none代替不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；代替可数名词作主语时，谓语动词可用单数也可用复数形式。none还可以在句中作宾语。
注意：none既可以指人又可以指物，no one只能指人。
（6）each和every
each（各个），指两个或两个以上的人或物，侧重个体，在句中作主语、宾语、定语和同位语。every（每个），指三个或三个以上的人或物，侧重整体，在句中只能作定语。
Every student it our class has a dictionary.(定语，强调班上“所有的人”)
Each student in our class has a dictionary.（定语，强调各个个体）
Each of them has been there.（主语）
The teacher gave each of the students a new textbook.（宾语）
We each got a ticket.（同位语）
（7）either和neither
either是“两者中任何一个”的意思，可修饰或代替单数可数名词，neither是“两者中没有一个”的意思，可以修饰或代替单数可数名词，它们可在句在作主语、宾语或定语。如：
Here are two pens. You may take either of them.(宾语)
Neither boy knows French.(定语)
注意：①either也作副词，其意为“也”，用于否定句的句末。He doesn’like tea, and I don’t either.（状语）②either与or构成连词，意为“不是……就是……”或“要么……要么……”。He is either Japanese or Chinese. ③neither用作副词，意为“也不”，即“not…either”。He can’t do it, neither can I. ④neither可与nor构成连词，意为“既不……也不”。Neither he nor you are a student.
（8）other和another, the others 和others
the other表示“两者中的另一个”；“the other + 复数可数名词”
表示“其余（他）的……”；the others表示“其他的人或物”。“others及other + 复数名词”泛指“其他的（别的）人或物”。这些词语在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。如：
He got two books; one is textbook, the other is a novel.
Five of the pencils are red, the others(the other pens)are yellow.
Some are singing, others are dancing.
another修饰或代替单数可数名词，意为“（三个或三个以上的）另一个”，不能指两者中的另一个，在句中可作宾语和定语。
This coat is too dark. Please show me another.(宾语)
Please give me another book.（定语）
注意：another修饰复数名词时，意为“再，又”。如：Please give me another ten minutes. one … another(a second)… a third…the other…意为“一个……一个……一个……一个”用于三者或三者以上的排列。some…others…others…，意为“一些……一些……一些”。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. The Parkers bought a new house but__________will need a lot of work before they can move in.(NMET 2001)
A.they B.it C.one D.which
解析：答案为B。分析题意可知，they显然不合，which多引导从句，从此为并列句式，one表示泛指，而此处空格内容指代前面提到的the new house。要仔细区别代词的所指范围，是人还是物，单数还是复数，另应注意句式。
2．If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay_________$ 15.（NMET 2000）
A.another B.other C.more D.each
解析：答案为A。本题考查不定代词用于表示数量附加的用法。“another + 数字 + 复数名词”结构通常用来表示在原有数量上的附加。若选C，正确结构是“数词 + more + 复数名词”。掌握another和more与数字搭配的位置是此题关键。another放在数字前，more放在数字后。NMET 1995中第25小题命题思路与此题一致。
3. Few pleasures can equal ___________of a cool drink on a hot day.(NMET 1999)
A.some B.any C.that D.those
解析：答案为C。本题考查替代词that的用法。that通常在句中替代同类的、特定的但不是同一的事物。本句中that替代the pleasure。句意为“在炎热的夏天几乎没有任何乐趣能与饮一杯冷饮的乐趣相比”。that指代单数或不可数名词，复数用those，表示特指，以避免重复，在比较句型中较为常用，代替可数名词时可换用the one。
4. I like in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.
A. this B. that C. it D. one
解析：答案为C。本句考惯用法及代词。Like是及物动词，需要宾语。此处“it”指模糊的情形或环境，无具体指代，其余项均不可。又如：I like it here（我喜欢这儿）。
5.That’s an unpleasant thing to say about your father after he’s done for you.
A. something B. anything C. all D. that
解析：答案为C。本题考代词及定语从句。整句意思；在你父亲为你做了所有一切之后再说你父亲（的坏话）是件令人不愉快的事。
6.We needed a new cupboard for the kitchen. So Peter made from some wood we had.
A. it B. one C. himself D. another
解析：答案为B。考代词。全句意为：我们需要为厨房填个橱柜，所以Peter用我们所拥有的木头做了一个。代词one替代上文的名词a cupboard,非特指的指代，正合题意。it应指代上文提到的同一事物，为特指，故不可。C项离题意太远，D项指“又”，“再”的意思，亦不可。
&7&语法复习专题（1）
Unit1 名词
一、考点聚焦
1.可数名词单、复数变化形式
（1）规则变化。
①单数名词词尾直接加-s。如：boy — boys, pen — pens。
②以s、x 、ch 、sh结尾的单词一般加-es。如：glass — glasses,box— boxes, watch — watches, brush — brushes。
特例：stomach — stomaches。
③以“辅音字母 + y”结尾的变“y”为“i”再加“-es”。如：
baby — babies, lady — ladies, fly — flies。
④以“o”结尾的多数加-es。如：tomato — tomatoes, potato — potatoes, hero — heroes。但以两个元音字母结尾的名词和部分外来词中以o结尾的词只加-s。 如：radio — radios, zoo — zoos, photo — photos, piano — pianos, kilo — kilos, tobacco — tobaccos。
⑤以“f”或“fe”结尾的名词复数形式变“f”或“fe”为“v”，之后再加-es。如：wife — wives, life — lives, knife — knives, wolf— wolves, self — selves, leaf — leaves等。特例：handkerchief— handkerchiefs, roof — roofs, chief — chiefs, gulf — gulfs, belief — beliefs, cliff — cliffs。
⑥改变元音字母的。如：man — men, mouse — mice, foot — feet,
woman — women, tooth — teeth, goose — geese, ox — oxen。特例：child — children。
⑦复合名词的复数形式。（A）在复合词中最后名词尾加-s。如：armchair — armchairs, bookcase — bookcases, bookstore — book-
stores。（B）man和woman作定语修饰另一个名词时，前后两个名词都要变成复数。如：man doctor — men doctors, woman driver — women dri-
vers。（C）与介词或副词一起构成的复合名词应在主体名词部分加-s。如：brother-in-law — brothers-in-law, passer-by — passers-by。
⑧有的名词有两种复数形式。如：zero — zeros 、zeroes, deer —
deers 、deer。penny的两种复数形式含义有所不同。如：pence（便士的钱数），pennies(便士的枚数)。
（2）不规则变化。
①单、复数同形。如：means, aircraft, deer, fish, Chinese,
Japanese, sheep, works（工厂）,cattle。
②合成名词的复数。如：boy-friend — boy-friends, go-between— go-betweens(中间人)，grown-up — grown-ups。
③有些名词通常只用作复数。如：glasses眼镜，clothes衣服，goods
货物，trousers裤子，belongings所有物,wages工资，riches财富, surroundings环境，ashes灰尘, campasses圆规，cattle家畜，congratulations祝贺，have words with sb. 同某人吵架，in high spirits以很高热情地，give one’s regards to sb.向某人问侯，in rags衣衫破烂，It is good manners to do sth.有礼貌做某事。
④集体名词的数。有些集体名词通常只用作复数，如：people,
cattle, police; 有些名词只用作单数，如：machinery, furniture, mankind, jewellery;有些名词既可用作单数又可用作复数，单数看做整体，复数看做集体的各个成员。如：The crew is large.船员人数很多（指整体）；The crew are all tired.船员们都累坏了（个体）。
2、不可数名词的数
（1）一般说来抽象名词为不可数名词，但当抽象名词表示具体的东西时，可用作可数名词且词义发生变化，主要类型如下：
①抽象名词表示具有某种特性、状态、感情情绪的人或事。如：
抽象名词（不可数） 具体化（个体名词，可数名词）
in surprise惊讶地 a surprise一件令人惊讶的事
win success获得成功 a success一个(件)成功的人(事)
win honor赢得荣誉 an honor一个(件)引以为荣的(事)
Failure(失败)is the mother of success a failure失败者
失败是成功之母。
by experience靠经验 an experience一次经历
youth青春 a youth一个青年人
have pity on sb.怜悯某人 a pity可惜的事情
with pleasure乐意 a pleasure乐事
②抽象名词与a(an)连用，淡化了抽象概念，转化为似乎可以体验到的动作、行为或类别。如：
A knowledge of English is a must in international trade.
Would you like to have a walk(swim, bath, talk)with me
It is waste of time reading such a novel.
She made an apology to her mother for her wrong doings.
(2)物质名词是不可数名词，但表示数量或种类之多时，可以用作可数名词。如：
①物质名词有形或数的相应物体，有单、复数。如：some coffee一些咖啡，a coffee一杯咖啡，three coffees三杯咖啡，some drink一些饮料, a drink一杯饮料，three drinks三杯饮料，his hair他的头发，a few grey hairs几根白发，glass玻璃，a glass一只玻璃杯。
②物质名词有前置后置修饰时，前面要使用不定冠词。
have breakfast The road is covered with snow.
have a wonderful breakfast They have a heavy snow every year.
Time and tide wait for no man.
We had a wonderful time last night.
(3)有复数形式的不可数名词
①有些抽象名词往往以复数形式出现，起到一种丰富语言感彩或强调某种特殊状态的作用。如：
Use your brains, please.
They have smoothed away the difficulties.
Have you made preparations for tomorrow’s meeting
Many thanks for your kindness.
No pains, no gains.
After many failures, they finally succeeded.
②有些物质名词以复数形式出现，表示数量之多，范围之广。如：
The boy burst into tears at the bad news.
The rising waters did a lot of harm to the crops.
The stone bridge broke down in heavy rains.
3.名词所有格
（1）“’s”所有格的特殊表示形式有：
1 用于表示时间、距离、价格、重量等的名词后，如：today’s
newspaper,five minutes’walk(drive),five pounds’weight, tend
ollars’worth of coffee。
②用于表示国家、世界、城市等地方的名词后。如：the earth’s planet, the word’s population, China’s industry, New York’s parks。
（2）“of”所有格的特殊表示方式有：
①表示“部分”时，一般在所修饰的名词前有一个表示数量的词（a、two、several、some、no、many等），如：Some students of Mister Zhang’s have gone to college.张老师的一些学生已经上大学了。
②表示“其中之一，其中一部分”的意思时，用：a friend of Tom’s
汤姆的一个朋友（许多朋友中的一位）。
③表示赞扬、批评或厌恶等感彩时，应该用：that/this/these/
those + 名词（单、复数）of Mary’s/yours/his/hers。如：
That invention of hers belongs to the world. 她的那项发明是属于全世界的（表赞赏）。
4、名词作定语
英语中有些名词没有其对应的同根形容词，这些名词可以直接用来作定语修饰另一个名词。
（1）分类意义。
air pollution 空气污染 boy friend 男朋友
coffee cup咖啡杯 income tax所得税
tennis ball网球 song writer歌曲作家
body language身体语言 road accident交通事故
Nobel Prize诺贝尔奖
（2）时间、地点、称呼等。
Doctor Jack杰克医生 Professor Li李教授
evening school夜校 winter sleep冬眠
street dance 街舞 country music乡村音乐
village people村民 school education学校教育
China problem中国问题
（3）表目的、手段、来源，所属意义。
reception desk接待台 sports field田径场
stone table石桌 color TV彩电
weather report天气预报
★二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.
(NMET 2001)
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。当名词前有what、so、as、too、quite等词修饰时，其形容词被这些词修饰，组成下列结构，如：What a nice book! This is too heavy a box for me to carry. He is not as honest a boy as Mike.等，应采取too/how + 形容词（副词）+ a(an) + 名词的形式。要记住一些类似的特殊结构，并加以分析。
2. The police are offering a __________to anyone who can give information about the lost key.（NMET 1999）
A.price B.prize C.reward D.money
解析：答案为C。price 价格，价钱；prize奖金。Ｄ项是钱，属不可数名词，题中所要填的是“酬金，报酬”。注意正确理解名词的含义及其搭配是活用语言的基础，在复习备考中要熟练掌握考纲中一些名词的词义、搭配、习惯等，才能更好辨析名词，从而选择最符合句意的选项。
3.You’ll find this map of great _____________in helping you to get round London.（NMET 1998）
A.price B.cost C.value D.usefulness
解析：答案为C。本题考查特定语境中名词的词义及“be of + 抽象名词”结构。Price (价格)，cost（价钱，费用，成本）不符合题意，value作“quality of being useful or desirable”解时，常与of搭配，在句中作表语或补语，意为“有用，有价值”。故选择value。注意名词词义辨异及惯用法表达，题中“of + 抽象名词”相当于该名词的形容词形式。
4.If you buy more than ten, they knock 20 pence off .
A. a price B. price C. the price D. price
解析：答案为C。本题考冠词和名词。全句合理句意应是：如果你买超过10个，他们从（现在标出的）价格上减价20便士。此处价格是特指的定价，所以C项最佳。
5.The journey around the world took the old sailor nine moths, the sailing time was 226 days.
A. of which B. during which C. from which D. for which
解析：答案为B。辨析名词语义, a distance of +数字“……距离”。
6.I keep medicines on the top shelf, out of the children’s .
A. reach B. hand C. hold D. place
解析：答案为A。“out of reach”是“超出某人够得着的范围”，即“够不着”的意思，药品应放到孩子够不到的地方。
&2&高一下学期英语词汇
1. ought to应当，应该
2. keep up with跟上，赶上
3. plenty of许多，大量的（作定语）
4. in plenty许多，丰富（作状语）
5. make a choice做出选择
6. now and then偶尔，时而
7. prepare a dish做一道菜
8. a balance diet均衡饮食
9. be/go on diet在节食
no longer不再
10. be based on/upon以…为基础
take medicine吃药
11. be harmful to对…有害
12. offer advise about/on提…的建议
13. lose weight减肥
14. cut …into pieces把…切碎
15. gain weight=put on weight增肥
16. make up for补偿
17. get along with和…相处
18. put up with忍受
19. go for sb对某人也一样
20. in large amount大批地
21. be short of=be lacking of 缺乏，缺少
22. do up one’s hair做发型
23. refer to查阅，提到
24. settle down定下心来，安家落户
25. settle up付清，结账
26. settle for勉强同意，接受
27. settle in（使）习惯（环境等）
28. settle on定居（短暂停留）
of high/good quality高质量的
29. sign an agreement with…与…达成协
30. in relation to与…有关的
31. but for要不是
32. thanks to由于，幸亏
33. apart from除…之外
34. hand down传下来
35. and so on等等
36. in ancient time在古代
37. go against违背
38. guide to（介词）指导
39. of (no) effect（无）效
40. take effect生效，奏效
41. bring/carry…into/to effect实施
42. come/go into effect开始实施
43. depend on/upon依靠
44. That/It (all) depends.这很难说。
i. stand for代表
45. in condition身体好
46. out of condition身体不好
47. on condition that….如果，条件是
48. in/under favorable conditions在有利形势下
49. bring in引进，赚钱
a) year after year年复一年
50. Point out指出
51. make use of利用
52. tongue twister绕口令
a) be on good terms (with sb.)关系好
53. drive off开走，击退
54. look on…as把…看作…
55. Ahead of更前，更早
56. give sb a hand给某人帮助
57. Get through通过，到达
58. tear down拆毁
59. Hold up举起
60. Intend to do sth打算做某事
61. Intend to have done本想做（而没能做）
62. Intend…for…=be intended for…供……用
63. Dress up打扮，装饰
64. in one’s opinion依某人之见
65. Play a trick on sb开某人玩笑
66. take in收容，理解，包含，欺骗
67. Be determined to do sth下决心做……
68. Gift money压岁钱
69. fire works鞭炮
70. Save money存钱
71. ask for a day off请一天假
72. Happen to meet碰巧遇见
73. be jealous of sb嫉妒某人
74. Believe in信仰
75. dress up as装扮成，打扮成
76. Do crime犯罪
77. light up照亮
78. Do honor to sb=do sb honor礼遇某人，对某人表示敬意
79. On purpose=by accident故意地
80. care for喜欢，照顾
81. Make fool of愚弄
82. in other words换句话说
83. hope for对…希望
84. seek after追求
85. A similar to B A和B相似
86. take on呈现
87. Or else或者
88. personal affair隐私
89. Date back to =date from始于，追溯到
90. Appreciate good food欣赏美味
91. suit…to…使…适合于…
92. Be suit to/for适合于…
93. In all direction朝四面八方
94. in …direction=in direction of朝…的方向
95. under the direction of在…的指导下
96. Follow one’s directions遵照某人的指示
97. Be angry with sb for sth…因…生某人的气
98. be likely to很有可能
99. make fun of取笑
100. No laughing matter不是闹着玩的
101. exist…in 存在于…
102. Get into contact with sb与某人取得联系
103. Make contact with sb与某人联络
104. (be) in contact with 与…有交往
105. lose/break contact with与……失去联系
106. go ahead 前进
107. be crazy about对…着迷
108. go into details细说
109. in detail详细地
110. focus…on…把…集中于…
111. occur to sb使某人突然想到
112. fell down感到闷闷不乐
113. in a hurry匆忙地
114. accept …as认为…是…
i. bring on引发
115. make oneself done使…被…
116. make conversation交谈
117. have/hold a conversation with与……交谈
118. be in conversation with与…谈话中
119. divide…into..把…分成…
120. ivide between/among…把…分给…
121. achieve success获得成功
122. an injured look一副受冤的表情
123. call on 拜访（某人）
a) call at拜访（某地）
124. bring back拿回来，使恢复
125. day and night日日夜夜地
126. pay off还清
127. at most 至多
128. a number of许多
129. a great deal of许多
i. pick out挑出，辨别出
130. test on在…做实验
131. be continued 未完待续
132. pay back偿还，报复
133. sth of good/poor quality质量好的…
134. would rather宁愿
135. after all毕竟
136. be well worth 很值得
137. without luck运气不好
138. in the hope of doing…抱着…的希望
139. bring about引起，导致
140. bring up哺育
141. belong to sb/sth属于…
142. without limit无限地
143. run/take a risk冒险
144. limit…to …把…限制在…
a) at risk处于危险中
145. at any risk不顾一切
146. at the risk of冒着…的危险
147. to one’s sorrow使…悲伤的是
148. than usual 比平常…
149. badly off贫穷的
150. bear/take one’s share of…负担…的部分
151. keep…at harm’s length保持…的距离
152. a total failure一个彻底的失败者
153. save the situation收拾局面
154. trade in以交方式购入
155. trade with从事贸易
156. be popular with受…的欢迎
157. culture of mind and body身心修养
158. (be)of (no) use有（无）用
159. put…to use利用
160. to one’s knowledge 据某人所知
161. express oneself表达自己的意思
162. tell…from…把…和…分开
163. means of transport交通方式
164. together with=as well as也
165. against to the wall靠着墙
166. without a sound悄无声息地
167. pull out把…拉上来
168. not later than不迟于
169. get close to接近…
170. just as 恰如
171. without turning a hair毫不畏惧
172. in disorder混乱
173. be familiar with 熟悉
174. rushed off one’s feet忙于工作
175. at work忙于工作
176. n the go奔波
177. go through with 完成
178. at one go一口气
179. miss one’s turn 错过
180. be devoted to sb喜欢某人
181. to…degree 达到…程度
182. succeed in doing sth成功的做了某事
183. do about处理 应付
184. clear away清除打扫
185. go out熄灭
186. push open推开
187. be up to sb 由某人决定
188. tire out筋疲力尽
189. not a bit = not at all一点也不
190. there is no doubt毫无疑问
191. be willing to do = like to do愿意
192. a number of 若干 ，一些
193. the rule of conduct行为准则
194. charge a pipe给烟斗塞烟
195. be charged with充满……
196. tear at sth撕扯……
197. fasten…to…把…拴在…上
198. explain sth to sb = explain to sb sth向某人解释某事
199. fasten one’s eyes to sb眼睛盯着某人
200. in tears哭泣，掉泪
201. end in a tie以平局结束
202. in your own words用你自己的话
e into use开始使用
204. can’t help doing忍不住
205. stop…from doing阻止
206. leave sth done 让……做……
207. by choice 出于选择
208. for choice要选就选
209. ask after sb问候某人
210. give away赠出，让出
211. set the scene为某事做准备
212. full dress盛装
213. a pieces of jewellery一件珠宝
214. look about/around 警戒
215. look on旁观
216. look through浏览
217. look up to尊敬
218. act for代理
219. act on/upon对……起作用
220. know of听说过
221. by chance偶然地
222. by mistake由于疏忽
223. be in use在使用中
224. make a great discovery完成一项重大任务
225. bring…to use= put …to use加以利用
226. call sb names谩骂某人
227. in the name of以……的名字
228. in change主管
229. free of change免费
230. at one’s own change自费
231. out of control失去控制
232. be particular about对…挑剔
a) knock over撞翻
233. lay down one’s life献出生命
234. a man of name知名人士
235. turn in归还，交上
236. carry on research进行研究
237. take up research开始研究
238. act against违反
239. speak against发表抨击
240. little by little逐渐地
241. out of date这时的
242. up to date最新式的
243. to date 到目前为止
put a date to sth注明日期
244. set/fix the date确定日期
245. keep a date赴约
246. go off 出发，爆发（机器等停止）
247. go into详细调查
248. go by 走过，……流逝
249. go beyond超越
250. go about 四处走走，开始
251. around the corner即将来临，在拐角处
252. die down平息
e to terms with甘心忍受
254. what else而且
255. be about to即将开始
256. at the top of one’s voice大声地
257. self rescue自救
258. be mean with对…吝啬
259. take shelter躲避
260. work with sb对……起作用
261. smell of闻出……的味道
262. break up弄碎
263. hold up阻滞
264. a threatening letter恐吓信
265. somehow or other设法，想办法
266. admire sb as…钦佩某人是…
267. admire sb for sth 钦佩某人的…
268. admire oneself in the mirror照镜子
269. rise/come to fame 成名
270. opposite to 在…对面
271. to one’s regret 使某人遗憾的是
272. be surrounded with/by被…围绕
273. get/gain/take possession of占有，占领
274. make up组成，构成，凑足
275. turn to转向，求助于
276. go sailing 驾船航行
277. go camping宿营
e into one’s possession被某人占有
279. in one’s possession=in the possession of sb被某人据有
280. (be) in possession of持有，拥有
281. 零 散 记 忆
282. only+介词短语(方式状语)+倒装句
283. e.g.: Only in this way will we be ready for the…
284. the only/just/very/first + n.+ that(who)+定从
285. 当n.为物时只用that,当n.为人时只用who。
286. be of + 抽象名词，表“具有……”
287. begin to do 和begin doing
a) 一般情况下意思相同，但 1）begin为现在进行时时；
288. 2）当begin后为think,realise等类词时，只用to do。
289. Make it (F.O) +adj+to do sth.
290. To,on,in 在表方位时：
a) on表接壤 2）in在范围之内 3）to不接壤
291. 7、hope: 1)+that-clause 2)+to do 3)+for sth
292. a/the way (that) +定语从句
293. to do 和v-ing 做主语和宾语：
294. to do一次性和具体性；v-ing表经常性延续性
295. so…that… “如此…以致于…”引导结果状从句。
296. So…部分放在句首时，句子要倒装
297. 比较：so…that…和such…that…的句型构成
a) so+adj./adv.+that… such+a(n)+adj.+n.+that…
b) such+adj.+U.C.N.+that…
298. such+n.(pl.)+that…
299. with+宾+宾补（形容词、介词短语、副词、分词、不定式），在句中状语或定语
300. 12、a great many+n.(pl.),当此名词前有限定词如the ,these,those等，则用a great many of
301. 13、系表结构 stay+adj. 一直保持某种状态
302. 14、only to do sth 这一结构常作结果状语，用以指随即发生的意料之外的事，有“反而，却”之意。
303. 15、 advise(n. advice) “建议，忠告”
304. 1）advise+n./pron. 2)advise sb. (not) to do sth
305. 3)advise doing sth 4)advise sb.+clause(虚拟语气)
306. 16、the reason 与for连用表语从句只用that引导
307. 17、used to:
1. used not to +动词原形=usedn’t to+动词原形
308. did not use to+动词原形=didn’t use to+动词原形
1. used+主+to+动词原形
2. did+主+use to+动词原形
i. It seems to that…
309. 18、seem It seems as if/though…
i. There seems (to be)…
310. 19、Seem,that和appear
311. 三词后均可加形容词、副词、分词等；
312. appear,seem后可接to do ,而look后只加to be
313. look后只可接as if引导的从句，不能接that 从句
i. 20、accept
314. n./pron 接受……
1. sb/sth+as+n./adj.把……视为，接受……
2. that-clause 承认
315. 21、worth与worthy
1. n.值多少钱 of sth值得，配得上
316. be worth+ be worthy + of being值得做
a) doing 值得的 to be done值得做
317. 22、 a.have sb doing 使某人做某事，表动作一直进行
i. b.have sb do 使某人做某事，表动作完成或可能发生
ii. c.have sth to do 有某事要做，have意为“有，拥有”
iii. d. have sth done 使某事被做，done表被动动作
318. 23、表“许多大量”的几个词组：
i. a great/good many
a) a large/great/good number of +可数名词
i. a good few/quite few
ii. many a
iii. a great/good deal of
iv. a large/great amount of +不可数名词
v. quite a little
vi. a lot of/lots of
vii. a large/great quantity of +可数名词或
viii. large quantities of 不可数名词
ix. plenty of
x. 24、keep doing sth.一直干，后跟状态性动词
1. keep on doing sth.反复干……，强调动作的重复
xi. 25、It is…for sb to do sth
1. It is…that-clause
xii. 26、happen
xiii. 主（人）+happens+to do
xiv. It(形主) +（so）happen +that-clause
xv. 27、allow(vt.)
xvi. a. allow+ 名/形 b. allow+含有不定式的复合宾语
xvii. c. allow+动名词 d. allow+sb.+介词短语/副词
xviii. 28、连系动词的分类：
1. 变化类：become,go,get,grow,fall,turn ect.
2. 感官类：fell,smell,taste,look,sound ect.
3. 显现类：appear,seem,look ect.
4. 状态类：keep,stay,come,stand ect.
xix. 29、though相当于however ,用于句末。
xx. 30、动词+to构成的短语：
xxi. look forward to盼望… turn to求助于，转向
xxii. pay attention to注意 stick to坚持
xxiii. get down to开始认干 object to反对
xxiv. belong to属于 refer to涉及，谈到
xxv. point to指向 see to处理，料理
e to共计，苏醒 reply to答复
xxvii. agree to同意 add to增加
b) devote…to…贡献…给… compare…to…把…比作…
319. 高一下学期语法重难点集汇
320. 主谓一致
a) 主谓一致是指一个句子的主语和谓语动词保持数的一致关系。一个句子中主谓一致，通常指三个基本原则：语法一致，即形式上一致；概念一致，即概念或意念上的一致；毗邻一致，即谓语动词的形式与邻近的名词一致。
b) 语法一致原则
i. 在通常情况下，一个句子的主语和谓语在语法形式上保持一致。即主语为单数形式，谓语也为单数形式；主语为复数形式，谓语也为复数形式。如：
1. This exercise on English idioms is not easy.这个英语短语练习不容易。
ii. 在“there be”结构中， “be”的单复数取决与后面主语的数.如：
1. There has been little change in this city.这个城市没有多少变化。
iii. 3、“one of”结构，位于用单数，“two of”结构位于用复数
iv. One of the things I want to do is traveling.我想做的一件事是去旅行。
v. Two of the boys have lost their way home.有两个男孩回家迷路了。
vi. 倒装句的主语在谓语之后，避免误用。
1. Never before has she been to Paris!她以前从未去过巴黎。
c) 概念一致
i. 主语是抽象概念、短语或从句，谓语用单数形式。如：
ii. To tell lies is wrong.说谎是不正确的。（不定式做主语）
iii. Keeping the house is a tiring job.管理家务是一件很劳累的事。（动名词做主语）
iv. How this happened is not clear to anyone.(从句做主语)
v. 注意：
321. 用what或which引导的主语从句或简单句中的数的概念取决于后面的表语，因为它们在逻辑上的意义是相同的。如：
1. Which is your seat 你的座位是哪一个？
a) Which are your seats 你们的座位是哪些？
322. 单个的分词作主语，不定式作主语，以及主语从句，谓语都用单数，若用连接上述的相同两个成分，谓语才用复数。
i. 两个或两个以上的主语用and和both连接时，谓语用复数形式。
ii. and连接的并列主语指同一人或同一样东西，and后的名词前没有冠词，谓语用单数；若有，则用复数。如：
1. My best friend and adviser has changed his mind again.我的密友兼顾问又改变他的想法了。
2. My friend and the student Sue are in the classroom.我的朋友和那位叫苏的同学在教室里。
a) 若and后面加not,谓语用单数。如：
i. Lilei,and not I, has won the game.是 Lilei赢了比赛，而不是我。
b) 用and 连接的单数主语，前面有each,every,many a,no等词修饰时，谓语用单数。
c) 复数主语前加each,谓语仍用复数。
d) no后面名词为单数，谓语用单数；后为复数，谓语用复数。
e) 毗邻一致
1. 由not only…but also,neither…nor…,either…or…,or 连接的并列主语，在肯定句中谓语变化取决于后面的饿主语，在疑问句中取决于前面的主语。如；
2. Either he or I am mistaken.他和我都没错。
3. Either he or you are to go there.不是他就是你要到那儿去。
f) （详见高一下册P155~P156）
323. 虚拟语气
1. 虚拟语气表示说话人的愿望、假设、猜测或建议，而不是事实。虚拟语气是通过句中的谓语动词的特殊形式来表现的，因此，掌握虚拟语气中的各种谓语动词的形式变化，是掌握虚拟语气的关键。
a) 虚拟语气在简单句中的用法
1. 虚拟语气用于简单句中，一般表示祝愿、命令等。谓语动词要用原形。
b) 虚拟语气在主从复合句中的用法
1. 在状语从句中的用法
i. 条件句中的用法
ii. 虚拟语气的条件句是用谓语动词的特殊形式来表现与现在、过去事实相反的情况或对将来发生的情况表示怀疑，和直陈语气条件句中的谓语动词形式以及表达的含义完全不同。虚拟语气条件句中所用的谓语动词的过去时、过去完成时、过去将来时等，只表示不同的虚拟语气，和直陈语气的过去时、过去完成时、过去将来时等毫无关系。
iii. 现将虚拟语气的各种具体形式和用法分述如下；
a) 表示与现在事实相反的情况
c) ①形式
条件从句的动词形式 主句的动词形式
If I (we,you,he,she,it,they)+行为动词的过去式（be的过去式一般用were） I (we) shouldYou (he,she , +动词原形或：they,it ) would 所有人称+might(could)+动词原形
324. ②用法：
a) If I had more time, I should study German.(fact:I have no more time, so I shall not study German. )
b) If she were not so busy, she would attend the meeting this afternoon.(fact:she is very busy, so she will not attend the meeting this afternoon.)
a) If they didn’t take physical exercises every day, they wouldn’t be so healthy.(fact: they take physical exercises every day, so they are very healthy.)
b) 表示与过去誓死相反的情况
c) ①形式；
条件从句的动词形式 主句的动词形式
If I (we,you,he,she,it,they)+had+过去分词 I (we) shouldYou (he,she , +have+过去分词或：they,it ) would 所有人称+could(might)+have+过去分词
325. ②用法：
a) I would have checked my paper again if I had had more time at yesterday’s examination.(fact:I had no more time at yesterday’s exam, so I didn’t check my paper again)
a) You would have already recovered from his illness if he had seen the doctor in good time.(fact: He didn’t see the doctor in good time ,so he hasn’t recovered from his illness )
b) 表示与将来事实相反的情况
326. ①形式：
条件从句的动词形式 主句的动词形式
If I (we,you,he,she,it,they)+行为动词的过去式（be的过去式一般用were）通常要与一个表将来的时间的状语连用If (we,you,he,she,it,they)+should+动词原形c. If I (we,you,he,she,it,they)+were to+动词原形 I (we) shouldYou would +动词原形或：he(she,it ) would they wouldI (we,you,he,she,it,they)+could(might)+动词原形
327. ②用法：
a) If it rains tomorrow, our picnic will be put off.(The weather has been changeable these days.)
b) If it rained tomorrow, our picnic would be put off.( The weather has beenvery good these days.)
c) If it should rain tomorrow, our picnic would be put off.(That would be out of our expectation.)
d) If it were to rain tomorrow, our picnic would be put off. (条件从句谓语动词用were to +动词原形，表示 下雨的可能性极小。Were to rain和should rain 都表示“出乎意料之外”，但were to加强表示“当初没想到以后的事”)
328. 混合时间条件句的用法：
i. 有时条件从句的动作和主句动作发生的 时间不一致。这时动词的形式，应根据它所要表达的具体时间来决定用什么形式。
a) If she hadn’t trained so hard, she wouldn’t be run so fast.（从句叙述过去，主句叙述现在。）
i. （fact: she has trained very hard, so she would able to run fast.）
ii. You would speak English well enough if you had practised reading and speaking it every day.(主句叙述现在，从句叙述过去)
iii. （fact: You didn’t practice (hasn’t practiced ) reading and speaking it every day, so you can’t speak English well enough.）
iv. 在其他状语从句中的用法
b) 主要用于由as if (as though) 引导的比较状语从句，从句中谓语动词一般用“动词的过去式（be 变were ）或had +过去分词。”
i. 如：
ii. She looked as if she were ill.(实际上她没有病，在这里用虚拟语气补语比喻她精神不佳)
iii. Xiao Liu speaks English so well as if he had studied in England.(这里用虚拟语气表现他的 英语说得好)
iv. （2）、在主语从句中的用法：
v. 通常由形式主语it引出的主语从句来表达。主语从句中，谓语动词用“should+动词原形”；表示“必要”“重要”“奇怪”等意思。
vi. It is necessary that you should clean the workshop after work.下班后你必须清扫车间。
vii. It is important that we should ask advice of other people about our work.在工作中，征求别人的意见是很重要的。
329. 在宾语从句中的用法（详见《高一上学期英语语法重难点集汇》）
1.
2.
PAGE
4语法复习专题（4）
Unit4 形容词和副词
一、考点聚焦
1、形容词、副词的作用与位置
形容词是用来修饰名词的，常被放在名词前作定语，或放在系动词后面作表语。而副词则用来修饰形容词、动词，其他副词或者句子，一般位于形容词之前，动词之后或句子之首。以下属几种特殊情况，须牢记；
（1）形容词短语作定语，定语后置。
a language difficult to master, a leaning tower about 180 feet high
（2）表语形容词（afraid、alike、alone、asleep、awake、alive等）作定语，定语后置。如a man alive。有些表身体健康状况的形容词如well、faint、ill只作表语。sick既可作表语又可作定语，ill如作定语意为“bad”。
（3）用作定语，修饰由不定代词one、no、any、some和every构成的复合词如anything、something等时，通常后置。如：
I have something important to tell you.
（4）else常用作疑问代词和不定代词的后置定语。
（5）enough、nearby修饰名词前置或后置，程度副词一般位于形容词、副词前面，enough修饰形容词、副词时，必须后置。
（6）几个副词并列作状语时，其顺序较灵活，但一般是：方式→地点→时间。如：
We had a good time together outdoors last Sunday.
（7）频度副词如often、always、usually等在be动词后，行为动词前。
（8）副词作定语，定语后置。如：
The person there is waiting for you.
（9）几个并列的形容词作定语，其语序通常为：限定语（The、A）+ 描绘性形容词 + size（大小）+ shape（形状）+ age（年龄、时间）+ color（颜色）+ origin（国籍、来源）+ material（材料）+ purpose（目的）+ 名词。如：
a heavy black Chinese steel umbrella,
the man’s first tow interesting little red French oil paitings
（10）以-ly结尾的词性辨析。
①下列单词以-ly结尾，但却是形容词而非副词：lively、lonely、lovely、deadly、friendly、ugly、silly、likely、brotherly、timely等。
②表愿意（无-ly）和引申意(有-ly)的副词：
deep深 wide宽广 high高 low位置低
deeply深入地 widely广泛地 highly高度地 lowly地位卑微
③有无-ly意义大不相同的副词：
dead完全，绝对be dead asleep
deadly非常be deadly tired
pretty相当be pretty certain that…
prettily漂亮地be prettily dressed
close近Don’t sit close.
closely密切地Watch closely!
late晚、迟arrive late, come late
lately最近I haven’t seen him lately(recently).
2、复合形容词的构成
（1）形容词 + 名词 + ed
kind-hearted好心的，white-haired白发的
(2)形容词 + 形容词
red-hot炽热的，dark-blue深蓝的
（3）形容词 + 现在分词
good-looking好看的，easy-going随和的
（4）副词 + 现在分词
hard-working勤劳的，fast-moving快速转动的
（5）副词 + 过去分词
hard-won得来不易的，newly-made新建的
（6）名词 + 形容词
life-long终生的，world-famous世界闻名的
（7）名词 + 现在分词
peace-loving爱好和平的，fun-loving爱开玩笑的
（8）名词 + 过去分词
snow-covered白雪覆盖的，hand-made手工的
（9）数词 + 名词 + ed
four-storeyed 4层楼的，three-legged 3条腿的
（10）数词 + 名词（名词用单数）
ten-year 10年的,two-man两人的
3、形容词和副词的比较等级
（1）原级的构成和用法。
构成：形容词、副词的原级即本身。
用法：表示双方在程度、性质、特征等某方面相等时，用“as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示双方不相等时，用“not so(as) + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构；表示一方是另一方的若干倍时，用“倍数 + as + 原级形容词/副词 + as”的结构。如：
Xiao Wang is as tall as Xiao Yu.
This building looks not so (as)high as that one.
Miss Xu speaks English as fluently as you .
This room is three times as large as that one.
（2）比较级和最高级的构成。
掌握比较级和最高级的变化规则，熟记少数不符合规则的特殊形容词和副词。
（3）比较级的用法。
①对方比较，表示一方超过另一方时，用“比较级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This picture is more beautiful than that one.
②表示一方不及另一方时，用“less + 原级 + than”的结构表示。如：
This room is less beautiful than that one.
③表示一方超过另一方的程度或数量时，可在比较级前加表示程度的状语，如even、a lot、a bit、a little、still、much、far、yet、by fay等修饰。如：
He works even harder than before.
注意：英语的比较级前如无even、still或yet等时，译成汉语时可用“较”或“…一些”或不译出，一般不可有“更”。如：
She is better than she was yesterday
Please come earlier tomorrow.
另注意：by far通常用于强调最高级。用于比较级时，一般放在比较级的后面，如在前面，应在二者中间加“the”。如：
He is taller by far than his brother.
He is by far the taller of the two brothers.
④表示一方随另一方的程度而变化时，用“the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语），the + 比较级（主语 + 谓语）”的结构（意为“越……越……”）。如：
The harder he works, the happier he feels.
⑤不与其他事物相比，表示本身程度的改变时，用“比较级 + and + 比较级”的结构。如：
The weather is getting colder and colder.
The girl becomes more and more beautiful.
⑥某些以-ior结尾的形容词进行比较时，用to代替than。这些词有inferior（劣等的，次的）、superior（较好的，优于……）、junior（资历较浅的）、senior（资格较老的）、prior（在……之前）等。
He is superior to Mr.Zhang in chemistry.
⑦在比较从句中为了避免重复，我们通常用that(those)、one(ones)代替前面出现的名词。that指物,one既可指人又可指物。that可代替可数名词单数和不可数名词，而one只能代替可数名词。
The book on the table is more interesting than that(或the one)on the desk.
A box made of steel is stronger than one made of wood.
⑧倍数表达法。（A）A is three(four, etc.)times the size(height, length etc.)of B.这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大（高）。The new bui9lding is four times the size(the height)of the old one.这座新楼比那座旧楼大三倍（高三倍）。（B）A is three(four, etc.)times as big(high, long, etc.)as B. Asia is four times as large as Europe.亚洲比欧洲大三倍。（C）A is three (four, etc.)times bigger(higher, longer, etc.)than B. Your school is three times bigger than ours.你们的学校比我们的学校大三倍。用times 表倍数通常用于三倍以上，两倍可以用twice或double.
(4)最高级的用法。
①三者或三者以上相比，表示最高程度时，用“the + 最高级”的结构表示。这种句式一般常有表示比较范围的介词短语。如：
Zhang Hua is the tallest of the three.
He works(the)hardest in his class.
②最高级可被序数词以及much、by far、nearly、almost 、by no means、not quite、not really、nothing like等词语所修饰。如：
This hat is by far / much / nearly / almost / not nearly / by no means / not quite / nothing like the biggest.
How much did the secon most expensive hat cost
③表示“最高程度”的形容词，如excellent、extreme、perfect等，没有最高级，也不能用比较级。
④形容词最高级修饰作表语或介词宾语的名词、代词时，被修饰的词往往省略。如：
He is the tallest(boy)in his class.
⑤作状语的副词最高级前可以不加定冠词。如：
Of all the boys he came(the)earliest.
(5)形容词和副词前面使用冠词的情况。
①形容词最高级前一般要加定冠词，副词最高级前可不加冠词。
②形容词最高级前有时加不定冠词，或不加冠词，不表比较，表示“非常”。如：
He is a most clever young policeman.(a most=very)
The film is most interesting.(most=very)
③表示两者间“较……的一个”比较级前加the。如：
who is the older of the tow boys
④在“the + 比较级…，the + 比较级…”结构中。
⑤在same前一般要加the。
⑥有些形容词前加the 成为名词。如the poor、the rich 等。
（6）由as / so组成的形容词或副词短语。
1 as much as + 不可数名词数量。
Each stone weighs as much as fifteen tons.
She could earn as much as ten dollars a week.
②as many as + 可数名词数量 多达
I have as a many as sixteen referrence books.
③as early as早在
As early as the twelfth century the English began to invade the island.
④as far as远到；就……而知（论）
We might go as far as (走到)the church and back.
As far as I know（就我所知），he has been there before.
⑤may (might, could)as well不妨、不如
Then you might as well stay with us here.
⑥as … as can be到了最……的程度，极其
They are as unreliable as they can be.他们极其不可信。
⑦as … as one can
He began to run, as fast as he could.
⑧as … as possible
Just get them to finish up as quickly as possible.
(7)几组重要的词语辨析。
①very 和much的区别。（A）可分等级的形容词和副词前使用very不用much。(B)表示状态的过去分词前用very。a very frightened boy, a very tired child, a very complicated problem, 一般的情况下，以-ing、-ed结尾的分词多用much、very much / greatly等修饰。如：We were greatly shocked by the news about Tom. I was much amused by Jack’s attitude。(C)已转化为形容词的现在分词前用very。如：very interesting / worrying / exicting。（D）too前用much或far,不用very。You are much / far / a lot too nice.另外，在too many / much, too few / little前用far。 There’s far too little opportunity for adventue these days.We’ve got far too many eggs and far too few egg cups.（E）关于原级形容词要记住下列固定的修饰结构：（a）修饰绝对意义的形容词，一般不用very,而用quite completely、well、entirely。如：quite wrong(mistaken, sure)、completely dead、quite impossible、quite perfect等。（b）修饰以a-开头的形容词，多有特殊的修饰词：quite alone, very much alone, wide awake, fast asleep, very much afraid。(c)修饰一些特殊形容词的修饰语有：be well worth, much the same, freezing cold, quite different, terribly cold / frightening。
②so … that … 与such … that … 的区别。
so + 形容词 / 副词 + that …
so + 形容词 + a（n）+ 单数可数名词 + that …
so + many / much / little / few + 名词 + that …
such + a(n)+ 形容词+单数可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 复数名词 + that …
注意：下列结构中只能用so不可用such,当名词前有many、much、little、few等表示“多、少”的词修饰时，如 so much progress、so many people、so little food、so few apples等。但当little表示“小”时用such。如：These are such little boys that they can’t dress themselves.下列so的用法是错误的：so a diffcult problem,so difficult problems, so hot weather。
③其他几组词的辨析。（A）ago、before:ago表示以现在为起点的“以前”；before指以过去或将来的某时刻为起点的“以前”。泛指“以前”用before而不用ago。（B）already、yet、still:already表示某事已经发生；yet表示期待某事发生；still表示某事还在进行，主要用于肯定句。
(C)too、also、either:too和also用于肯定句，too多用于口语，also多用于书面语，either用于否定句。(D)good、well:与good不同的是，well作形容词，只能在系动词后作表语，表示“身体状况好”，也作副词修饰动词。(E)quick、fast:作形容词皆表“快”。fast多指运动的物体，含持续的意思。quick多指一次动作的敏捷、突然，而且持续的时间较短。(F)real、true:形容词表“真的”。real强调真实存在的而不是幻想的，在句中常作定语；true指与事实标准和实际情况相符合，在句中作表语或定语。(G)hard、difficult:均表“困难”，但hard通常指体力上困难；difficult则指智力或技能上的困难，困难程度大于hard。它们都可作定语和表语。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. It is generally believed that teaching is ___________it is a science.（NMET 2001）
A.an art much as B.much an art as
C.as an art much as D.as much an art as
解析：答案为D。本题可从考查形容词的同级比较点入手。在同级比较as…as句式中，如果as后面的形容词作定语且其所修饰的名词前有不定冠词时，该冠词须置于形容词之后，即形成“as + 形容词 + a / an + 单数可数名词 + as”结构。这道题在名词专题中也有解析，不同的是观察视角不同，应注意培养发散思维。
2. It is always difficult being in a foreign country, __________if you don’t speak the language.(NMET 2000)
A.extremely B.naturally C.basically D.especially
解析：答案为D。本题考查副词的词义辨析。注意掌握词语的准确含义，结合语境进行分析。A项意为“极端地”；B项意为“自然地”；C项“基本上”；D项“尤其，特别地”。根据句意“如果你不会讲（它的）语言，在国外你就总会困难重重”可知答案。
3. Professor White has written some short stories, but he is ______known for his plays.(NMET 1998)
A.the best B.more C.better D.the most
解析：答案为C。本题考查副词的比较级和最高级。要把握句式之间的联系，抓住句子的隐藏信息，结合语境进行分析。根据句意，句中but后应有一词组be well known for…。同时，应注意到前后两个分句把professor White的短篇小说和戏剧进行了对比，故应用well的比较级。
4.I must be getting fat—I can do my trousers up.
A. fairly B. hardly C. nearly D. seldom
解析：答案为D。本题考副词，且继续使用了破折号，对前句解释说明。句中的“do up”指“系上、扣上、包扎上”等意，故全句合理的意思是：我几乎系不上裤子了，（因此）我一定在发胖。B项hardly是“几乎不”的意思，正合题意。
5.The house smells as if it hasn’t been lived in for years.
A. little white wooden B. little wooden white
C. white wooden little D. wooden white little
解析：答案为A。本题考名词前置定事的排序。多个词同时作前置定语时，排列规律一般是：代词性定语+冠/指示/物主/所有格+数词（先序后基）+形容词+国籍/材料/用途形容词或名词或动名词+被修饰的名词，其中数个形容词同时出现时，多用下列顺序：性质+大小+形状+新旧+颜色，有时也要看与名词的密切关系，越密切，越靠近名词。按上文所述，wooden表材料，放在最后，white 表颜色，放在little之后，故选A。
6.That doesn’t sound very frightening, Paul. I’ve seen . What did you like most about the film
A. better B. worse C. best D. worst
解析：答案为B。考查比较级的用法，由句意可知，我还见过比frightening更糟的，故选B。
&7&语法复习专题（8）
Unit8 情态动词
一、考点聚焦
1、 情态动词的基本用法
(1)can、be able to 和could
①can和be able to都表示能力，意思上没多大区别。但can只有现在和过去时，而be able to则有更多的形式。但当成功地完成某一具体动作时，通常不用could而用was/were able to来表示。这时was/were able to 相当于managed to，表示经过一番努力，终于能够完成某事。如：
Can you use chopsticks
The wounded man still was able to get to the village and was saved in the
end.
②can和could
can和could都可以表示能力、技能、许可、建议或请求和可能性。但比较委婉客气地提出问题或陈述看法，一般用could，回答时则用can。如：
Could you help me carry the bag
Can I help you
(2)may/might
①may/might表示可能，但may比might可能性大。如：-Why isn’t he in class
He may be sick.(生病的可能性较大)
—
He might be sick.(生病的可能性较小)
②may/might表示“允许”，may用于现在时或将来时，might常用在间接引语中表过去时，但might也可用于现在时间，表示比较委婉的语气，回答用may。如：
He says we may leave.
He said we might leave.
③may / might 表示建议或请求，但might比may 更客气，意思更肯定而无过去时态的含义。
Yes, you can / may.
—May / Might I use your bike —
No, you mustn’t
（3）must
①must表示必须，应该，没有时态变化。如：
You must do everything as I do.
②must表示肯定的推测。如：
The light is still on, so he must be at home.
③mustn’t 表示禁止做某事。如：
You mustn’t smoke in the office.
（4）have to
have to 表示“必须、不得不”，是由于某种外界（客观）原因而“必须”，“不得不”做某事，也可表示经常的或习惯性的事“必须”做。have to的否定形式表示不必。have to可用于多种时态中。如：
You will have to clean your own boots when you join the army.
I have to be at my office every evening.
（5）should / ought to
①should和ought to表示应当、应该，前者比后者语气轻。如：
You should / ought to work hard.
②should / ought to work hard.
Since she is not here, whe should / ought to be in the classroom.
③should / ought to的否定形式表示禁止之意。如：
Children shouldn’t smoke.
④should可表示陈述意见，推出建议或请求；而ought to可以表示劝告之意。如：
You ought to respect your parents.
He suggested that they should leave at once.
（6）will / would
①will 用于各种人称表示“意志”、“意愿”或“决心”等，否定式won’t + 动词。如：
I will tell you all about it.
Tom won’t do such a thing.
②will用于疑问句中，常用在第二称时表示说话人向对方提出“请求”或“询问”如：
Will you please tell her the news when you see her
③will 表示习惯性的动作，有“总是”、“惯于”的含义。如：
Fish will die out of water.
④would 表示客气的请求、建议或意愿。如：
Would you please be quiet
Would you like coffee
⑤would 表示过去反复发生的动作。如：
When I passed my school I would see my teachers who taught me 5 years ago.
（7）need
need 作“必要”讲，既可作情态动词，也可作实义动词。作实义动词时后面的动词不定式要带to，其变化与一般动词相同。如：
I need to think it over.
—Need you go now —Yes, I must./No, I needn’t
（8）dare
dare表示“敢”的意思。作为情态动词时，主要用在疑问句和否定句中。dare若作实义动词，后面可带to的不定式，此时to也可以省略。dare与need的用法相似。如：
How dare you say that
She doesn’t date(to)ask her father.
（9）used to
used to表示过去常常发生的动作或存在的习惯，但现在已不复存在了。如：
He used to smoke.
（10）shall
①shall作为情态动词用于第二、三人称，表示说话人的意愿，有“命令”、“警告、威胁、强制”和“允许”等意思。如：
We shall do as our teacher says.
You shall have the book as soon as I finish it.
②在疑问句中，shall用于征求对方的意见或请求指示，常用于第一、第三人称。如：
Where shall he wait for us
Shall we go out for a walk
2、情态动词表示推测或判断的用法
下表即是表示推测的情态动词使用的场合：
情态动词 对现在和未来的推测 对过去的推测 使 用 场 合
must must + 动词原形 must have done 肯定句
may / might may / might + 动词原形 May / might have done 肯定句、否定句
can /could can / could do Can / could have done 否定句、疑问名（could可用于肯定句）
should 用来表示一种估计的情况“按理会/估计会”should do/be should have done 肯定句、否定句、疑问句
例如：
It must have rained last night.
She may not be at home. = It is possible that she is not at home.
She can’t be at home. = It is impossible that she is at home.
They should be there right now.
3、情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法
情态动词用于虚拟语气中表示责备的感彩，用法如下：
（1）should have done表示“本来应该做某事而实际上未做”，而shouldn’t have done则表示“本不应该做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You should have told me about it earlier.
You shouldn’t have said such words to your parents.
（2）ought to have done也表示“本应该……”而ought not to have done则意为“本不应该……”。如：
You ought to have told me about it earlier.
You ought not to have said such words to your parents.
（3）needn’t have done表示“本无必要做某事而实际上做了”。如：
You needn’t have walked so quickly since time was enough.
（4）could have done表示“本来有可能……而事实上未做到”。如：
I could have come on time, but my car broke on the way.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. I was really anxious about you. You________home without a word.(NMET 2001)
A.mustn’t have B.shouldn’t have left
C.couldn’t have left D.needn’t have
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是情态动词在虚拟语气中的用法。题目给出的条件是“我确实非常担心你”，因此后面可知应是责备you不应该没说一句话就离开了。
2.—Are you coming to Jeff’s party
—I’m not sure. I__________ go to the concert instead.(NMET 2000)
A.must B.would C.should D.might
解析：答案为D。本题考查情态动词的基本用法。由题目中“I’m not sure”,表明我可能去Jeff’s party，也可能去音乐会，故用might。
3. —Will you stay for lunch
—Sorry, ____________. My brother is coming to see me.(NMET 99)
A.I mustn’t B.I can’t C.I needn’t D.I won’t
解析：答案为B。本题考查表示请求的英语口语，用will来向第二人称提问的疑问结构，是表示一种请求和意愿，是用疑问的形式来表达较为婉转的祈使语气，意思是“请你……，好吗”，对于这种问句的肯定回答是：Suree! Gertainly! Yes, of course. I’d be glad to 等；否定回答通常是：I’m sorry, I can’t. No, I’m afraid I can’t. I’m sorry, but … I’d like to, but …等。注意情态动词表客气的用法及其在一般疑问句中的问与答。
4.—Isn’t that Ann’s husband over there
—No, it be him I’m sure he doesn’t wear glasses.
A. can’t B. must not C. won’t D. may not
解析：答案为A。本题考查情态动词表推测。问：那边的难道不是Ann的丈夫吗？答：不是。不可能是他，我确信他不戴眼镜。
5.You be tired－you’ve only been working for an hour.
A. must not B. won’t C. can’t D. may not
解析：答案为C。本题考查情态动词。句中破折号后的内容对前一句进行解释说明：你只工作了一个小时，所以你不可能累的。表否定推测时用can’t。A项表禁止（不许），B项表未来，D项表不允许。均不可用，故选C。
6.I often see lights in that empty house. Do you think I report it to the police？
A. should B. whatever C. whichever D. whenever
解析：答案为A。本题考情态动词。在空房子里看到灯光，是一件奇怪而令人生疑的事，故问：你是否认为我应当把这事儿报告给警察？应用A。
*5*语法复习专题（15）
Unit15 it的用法
一、考点聚焦
1、it的基本用法
（1）用作人称代词，代替前文提到过的事物。
The train has arrived. It arrived half an hour ago.
（2）用以代替提示代词this, that。
—What’s this —It’s a knife.
—Whose watch is that —It’s mine.
（3）起指示代词的作用，指一个人或事物。
—Who is knocking at the door —It’s me.
（4）指环境情况等。
It was very noisy (quiet) at the very moment.
（5）指时间、季节等。
—What time is it —It’s eight o’clock.
It often rains in summer here.
（6）指距离。
It is a long way to the school.
（7）作形式主语。
It is not easy to finish the work in two days.
It is no use crying over spilt milk.
It is as pity that you didn’t read the book.
（8）作形式宾语。
I think it no use arguing with him.
I found it very interesting to study English.
He made it clear that he was not interested in that subject.
（9）用于强调结构。
It was Xiaoming whom(that)I met in the street last night.
It was in the street that I met Xiaoming last night.
It ws last night that I met Xiaoming in the street.
It was I who met Xiaoming in the street last night.
2、含有“It is …”的句型
（1）It is time (for sb.) to do sth.
It is (high) time that sb. did sth.(虚拟语气)
（2）It is + 形容词（+of / for sb.）+ to do sth.
通常用 of的词有brave、clever、careful、hopeless、kind、good、naughty、nice、silly、stupid、foolish、wise等。
（3）It is + 形容词 + that + sb. + (should) do sth.（虚拟语气）
能用于这个句型的形容词有strange、wonderful、natural、good、proper、right、wrong、well、fortunate、important、necessary、useless、likely、probable、impossible等。有时可省去should而直接用动词原形。如：
It is important that we should pay close attention to grain.
It is natural that he（should）say so.
（4）It is no use/ good + doing sth.
It is no use trying again = It is of no use to try again.
（5）It is + 被强调部分 + that/who + …
Was it in the street that you met her
Who was it that called him“comrade”
It was not until yesterday that I met my old friend.
It is in a small factory that my brother is going to work.（注意上述各句均为强调句型的“考点”）
比较：It is a small factory where my brother is going to work.（定语从句）
（6）It is said/reported/announced/ (well) known … that…
（7）It is/was + 时间 + since … 从……已多久了。
It is three years since I met him in Beijing.
It was a long time since I (had) lived in that small mountain village with these farmers.（注意两句中的时态）
It is five months since I arrived in New York.我到纽约已经五个月了。
It is five months since I was in New York.我离开纽约已经五个月了。
（注意：终止性动词表示从动作发生时算起；如果是状态动词或持续性动词，则从动作或状态结束时算起。）
（8）It is + 时间 + before …
这个句型和上面句型中时间都是时间段，如long、years、months、weeks、five days、three hours、twenty minutes等。不过主句的时态多用一般将来时或一般过去时。
It will be several years before we meet again.
我们要过好几年才能再见面。
It was not long before they set out for the front.
不久他们就出发去了前线。
（9）It is /was/will be the first/second/third … time that …
It is the first time that I have been here.
It was the second time that he had seen the film.
（10）It is up to sb. to do sth … 应由某人做某事。
It is up to you to decide whether we start or not.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. _________ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.(NMET 1995)
A.There B.This C.That D.It
解析：答案为D。本题考查作形式主语的用法。that引导的从句是真正的主语。为避免头重脚轻而平衡句子结构，将it置于句首作形式主语。
2. I hope there are enough glasse for each guest to have ________.(NMET 1995)
A.it B.those C.them D.one
解析：答案为D。本题考查替代词it和one的区别。it用于替代同类的、特定的、同一的事物；one替代同类的、泛指的人或物。根据题意“我希望有足够的杯子使每个客人有一个。”可知应用one泛指enough glasses中的一个。
3. Was __________ that I saw last night at the concert
A.it you B.not you C.you D.that yourself
解析：答案为A。本题考查强调句型的疑问式。只须将句序变为陈述句便不难得出答案。
4.It was back home after the experiment.
A. not until midnight did he go B. until midnight that he didn’t go
C. not until midnight that he went D. until midnight when he didn’t go
解析：答案为C。此题考查的是not…until句型的强调结构，其最根本结构是：He did not go back home after the experiment.①,把①转变为Not until midnight did he go back home after the experiment.②,注意②中的倒装结构，把②中划线部分放在强调结构It be 被强调部分that…中进行强调，但注意that从句后面不用倒装形式。
*3*语法复习专题（10）
Unit10 虚拟语气
一、考点聚焦
1、虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中
（1）表示与现在事实相反的假设，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用“过去式（be动词的过去式用were）”，而主句中的谓语动词用“would / should/ could / might + 动词原形”。如：
If I were a boy, I would join the army.
If the had time, she should go with you.
（2）表示与过去的事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词用过去完成时，主句中的谓语动词则用“would / should / might / could + have +过去分词”。如：
If he had taken my advice, he would have succeeded in the competition.
（3）表示与将来事实相反，条件状语从句中的谓语动词一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形，而主句中的谓语动词则用would / should/
could might + 动词原形。如；
If it were to rain tomorrow, the football match would be put off.
（4）当条件状语从句表示的行为和主句表示的行为所发生的时间不一致时，动词的形式要根据它所表示的时间作相应调整。如：
If they had worked hard, they would be very tired.(从句说的是过去，主句指的是现在)
以下表格是虚拟语气用于条件状语从句中时，主句和从句谓语动词的形式：
条件状语从句 主 句
与过去事实相反 had + 过去分词 should /would/could/might + have + 过去分词
与现在事实相反 一般过去时(be用were) would/should/could/might + 动词原形
与将来事实相反 一般过去时或should(were to) + 动词原形 Would/should/cold/might + 动词原形
有时侯在使用时可省略if,句子则可换成下列形式，即“were / had / should +主语”。如：
Were I a boy, I would join the army.
Had he taken my advice, he would have succeeded.
Were it not for the expense, I would go to Britain.
2、虚拟语气用于名词性从句
（1）虚拟语气在宾语从句中的运用。
①“wish + 宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望，译为“要是……就好了”等。表示现在不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用一般过去时；表示将来不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“would/could + 动词原形”；表示过去不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“had + 过去分词”或“could(should) + have + 过去分词”。如：
I wish it were spring all the year round.
I wish I had known the answer.
I wish I could fly like a bird.
②在表示建议、要求、命令等的动词suggest、advise、propose、demand、require、insist request、command、order等后的宾语从句中，谓语动词用should + 动词原形或是动词原形。如：
She suggested we (should)leave here at once.
The doctor ordered she should be operated.
（2）虚拟语气在同位语从句和表语从句中的运用。
作表示建议、要求、命令等的名词advise、idea、order、demand、plan、proposal、suggestion、request等的表语从句和同位语从句，从句中的谓语动词用“（should） + 动词原形”。如：
His suggestion that we (should)go to Shanghai is wonderful.
My idea is that they (should)pay 100 dollars.
（3）虚拟语气在主语从句中的运用。
在主语从句中，谓语动词的虚拟语气用“should + 动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇、不相信、理应如此等。如：
It is necessary(important, natural, strange, etc.)that we should clean the room every day.
It was a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc.)that you should be so careless.
It will be desired(suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)that she should finish her homework this afternoon.
注意：这种从句表示的是事实。如果说人对这种事实表现出惊奇的情感，就可用虚拟语气。反之，如果不表示惊奇等情感，that从句也可用陈述句语气。如：
It is pity that you can’t swim.
3、虚拟语气在其他场合的运用
（1）虚拟语气在as if/as though、even if/even though等引导的表语从句或状语从句中，如果从句表示的动作发生在过去，用过去完成时；指现在状况，则用一般过去时；指将来状况则用过去将来时。如：
He did it as if he were an expert.
Even if she were here, she could not solve the problem.
（2）虚拟语气用于定语从句中。
这种从句常用于句型“It is (high)time (that) … ”中，定语从句的谓语动词用一般过去时(be用were)或should + 动词原形，意思是“(现在)该……”。如：
It’s time that I picked up my daughter.
It’s high time we were going.
（3）虚拟语气用在if only引导的感叹句中。如：
If only I were a bird.
If only I had taken his advice.
（4）虚拟语气在一些简单句中的运用。
①情态动词的过去式用于现在时态时，表示说话人谦虚、客气、有礼貌或语气委婉，常出现在日常会话中。如：
It would be better for you not to stay up too late.
Would you be kind enough to close the door
②用于一些习惯表达法中。如：
Would you like a cup of tea
I would rather not tell you.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it _______. (NMET 95)
A.breaks B.has broken C.were broken D.had been broken
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是as if 引导的让步状语从句中的语气问题，as if引导的状语从句如果与事实一致，不用虚拟语气，如果与事实相反，应用虚拟语气。题中“当铅笔的一部分浸在水中，铅笔看上去好像断了”。而实际上铅笔并未断，与事实相反，前半部分陈述是一般现在时，因而本句是对一般现在时的虚拟，用were broken。
2. I didn’t see your sister at the meeting. If she ___________, she would have met my brother.(NMET 94)
A.has come B.did come C.came D.had come
解析：答案为D。本题考查的是if条件句中的虚拟语气。题意是：我在会议上没看到你姐姐，故你姐姐没来。因此如果“她来了”与事实相反，前面一句交代了虚拟语气的时态是一般过去时的虚拟，所以if从句中用had+过去分词。
3. —If he ___________, he ________that food.
—Luckily he was sent to the hospital immediately.(NMET 93)
A.was warned; would not take
B.had been warned; would not have taken
C.would be warned; had not taken
D.would have been warned; had not taken
解析：答案为B。本题考查的是条件状语从句与主句表示与事实相反时虚拟语气的用法。根据下一句语境可知，他事先并没有得到警告，表示过去时间的虚拟语气，故选B。
4.Mr.White at 8:30 for the meeting, but he didn’t show up.
A. should have arrived B. should arrive
C. should have had arrived D. should be arriving
解析：答案为A。本题考虚拟语气及责备的用法，全句意为：Mr.white 8:30（原本）应该到会的，但他没露面。全句谈的是过去的事，故应使用should have done结构，表原本该做而没做的事。
5.—I’ll tell Mary about her new job tomorrow.
—You her last week.
A. ought to tell B. would have told
C. must tell D. should have told
解析：答案为D。本题考查情态动词用法，should（ought to）have done表示说话人对发生的事性“责备”故选D。
6.—Let’s go and have a good drink tonight.
— Have you got the first prize in the competition
A. What for B. Thanks a lot.
C. Yes, I’d like to. D. Why not
解析：答案为A。考语境及交际用语。前句建议：今晚咱们出去好好喝一顿吧。喝一顿应有个来由和原因，且多是为了庆祝某事，所以后句问：为何事（庆祝）？你是不是在竞赛中得了一等奖？这样才能表示后者惊讶、疑问和兴奋，what for：为何而做某事？其余均不合语境。
*4*语法复习专题（6）
Unit6 数 词
一、考点聚焦
1、序号表示法
（1）单纯的序号，可在基数词前加number,简写为No.。如：No.1第一号
（2）事物名词的序号表达法有什所不同：
①对于一些小序号可有序数词也可用基数词表达，形式分别为：the +
序数词 + 名词；名词 + 基数词。如：第一次世界大战可以表示为the First World War或World War One。
②对于一些大序号我们通常只用一种表达法，即名词 + 数词。如：501号房间表示为Room 501, 538路公共汽车表示为Bus 538。
③可用a / the + number + 基数词 + 名词。如：a No.5 bus一辆五路公共汽车，the No.8 bus那辆8路公共汽车。
2、倍数的表达方式
一般情况下我们用以下三种倍数表达方式：
（1）倍数用在as + 形容词 / 副词（原级）+ as结构之前。如：
They have three times as many cows as we do.
（2）倍数放在形容词或副词的比较级之前或by + 倍数用在比较级之后。如：
This rope is four times longer than that one.
They produced more products in 2001 than those in 2000 by twice.
（3）倍数用在表示度量名词前，其基本结构为：倍数 + the + size / length / weight … + of + 表示比较对象的名词，也可用于倍数 + what引导的从句中。如：
This room is three times the size of that one.
The college is twice what it was 5 years age.
You can’t imagine that rats eat 40 to 50 times their weight.
3、大约数的表示方法
（1）用ten、dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million等数词的复数后加of短语来表示几十、几百、上千、成千上万等大约数概念。如：
The little boy buys dozens of pencils every term.
Thousands of people died in the earthquake.
Every year tens of thousands of people go to work in Guangdong Province.
（2）用、less than、under、below、almost、nearly、up to 等来表示小于或接近某数目。如：
He is good at English, so he can finish the paper in less than two hours.
（3）用more than、over、above、beyond、or more等来表示超过或多于某个数目。如：
Peking University has a history of more than 100 years.
（4）用or、or so、about、around、some、more or less等表示在某一数目左右。如：
About 50 people were present at that time.
（5）用to、from … to…、between … and表示介于两数词。如：
His salary rises from 20 dollars a week to 35 dollars a week.
（6）注意事项：dozen、score、hundred、thousand、million作数词表示确切数量时，不用复数。如：three score, five dozen, seven million等。
4、分数的表达方式
（1）分子用基数词，分母用序数词，分子大于1时，分母用复数。如：one-third三分之一，three-sevenths七分之三。
（2）分子与分母之间加in, 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one in ten 十分之一，five in eight八分之五。
（3）分子与分母之间加out of , 分子在前，分母在后，分子分母都用基数词。如：one out of ten十分之一，five out of eight八分之五。
5、百分数的表示法
（1）表示百分数直接将数词放在单词percent前面即可，如：twenty percent百分之二十。
（2）分数和百分数后面不能直接接名词或代词，而用以下形式：分数/百分数 ＋of + 冠词 / 限定词 + 名词 / 代词 ，其谓语动词与of后的名词在人称和数上保持一致，如：
Two-thirds of the money was spent on food.
About seventy percent of the earth surface is covered by water.
6、小数的表示法
小数的表示法，小数点前的总值发同其他数词一样，小数点用point,小数点后面的数读成个位数，如：9.65表示为nine point six five。218.39表示为two hundred and eighteen point three nine。
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. ____________ people in the world are sending information by E-mail every day.(2001年上海春季高考卷)
A.Several million B.Many millions
C.Several millions D.Many million
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是million表示确切数量的用法。million前需用数表确切数量，而不用many这类词，但可说many millions of（上百万的），故本题中用Several million。
2. The number of people invited __________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.(NMET 96)
A.were ; was B.was ; was C.was ; were D.were ; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是the number of + 名词与a number of + 名词作主语时谓语的单复数问题。the number of是“……的数目”，作主语时谓语动词用单数，而a number of 后接可数名词的复数形式，作主语时谓语动词用复数形式，故此题最佳选项为C。
3. Shortly after the accident, two ___________ police were sent to the sport to keep order .(NMET 92)
A.dozens of B.dozens C.dozen D.dozen of
解析：答案为C。此题考查的是数词dozen表示确切数量时的用法，dozen表示确切数量时用其单数形式，当dozens的复数后接of时则表示不确切数量，本题答案为C。
*3*第二部分 题型专项
阅读理解
一、考点聚焦
1、题型特点
阅读是理解和吸收书面信息的能力。《中学英语教学大纲》规定，中学生应侧重培养阅读理解能力。
阅读材料的选取原则为：
（1）阅读量不少于1000个单词。近三年超过2000字篇数为5篇，读速要求为44.2，44.6和46.3wpm。
（2）题材多样化，包括科普、社会、文化、政治、史地、经济、新闻报道乃至广告说明。
（3）体裁避免单一化，包括记叙文、说明文、应用文等。
2、试题要求
（1）掌握所读材料的主旨和大意，以及用以说明主旨和大意的事实和细节。
（2）既理解具体的事实，也理解抽象的概念。
（3）既理解字面意思，也理解深层含义，包括作者的态度、意图等。
（4）既理解某句、某段的意义也理解全篇的逻辑关系，并据此进行推理和判断。
（5）能根据材料所提供的信息，结合中学生应有的常识正确判断生词的含义。
3、基本能力
（1）能迅速看准每句的结构，抓住主句的主语、谓语、宾语。
（2）有一定的词汇量和辨词能力。
（3）能灵活运用所学语法知识，根据句中的某个词迅速断定真假、语态和时态等。
（4）对英美文化背景知识有一定了解。
（5）有良好的思维能力，能边看边加工所得到的信息，从而作出正确分析、判断和综合。
（6）有平时大量阅读作基础，有一定的语感和相当的阅读速度。
二、应试技巧点拨
1、四个步骤
（1）速读短文，了解短文的主旨大意，辨别文体，掌握结构。
（2）看题。了解考查内容，带着问题读材料，寻找答案。
（3）复读。对所选答案有针对性地寻找支撑论点的关键信息。
（4）核查。注意各题的答案应逻辑一致，不能自相矛盾。尽可能找到（从文中）根据，确保正确无误。
2、四个善于
（1）关于审题，找出文中依据。
（2）善于寻找线索。
（3）善于抓主题句，解决概括题。
（4）善于筛选、比较、衡量、综合文章的有用信息。
3、三个避免
（1）只见树木不见林。
（2）难题耗时太多。
（3）阅读方式不当。
三、精典范例
例1 （NMET 2001）
Shanghai: Car rentals（出租）are becoming more and more popular as an inexpensive way of taking to the roads. Business people, foreigners and families alike are making good use of the growing industry.
The first car rental firm opened in Shanghai in 1992 and now 12 car rental players are in the game, with more than 11,500 cars in their books.
The largest player—Shanghai Bashi Tourism Car Rental Center offers a wide variety of choices—deluxe sedans, minivans, station wagons, coaches. Santana sedans are big favorite.
Firms can attract enough customers for 70 percent of their cars every month. This figure shoots up during holiday seasons like National Day, Labor Day and New Year’s Day, with some recording 100 percent rental.
The major market force rests in the growing population of white-collar employees（白领雇员），who can afford the new service, said Zhuang Yu, marketing manager of Shanghai Angel car Rental Co.
( )1. The words “deluxe sedans”,“minivans”and “station wagons”used in the text refer to ___________.
A.cars in the making B.car rental firms
C.cars for rent D.car makers
( )2. Which of the following statements is true according to the text
A. 70% of the cars can be rented out on holiday.
B. 70% of the customers are while-collar employees.
C. More firms are open for service during holiday seasons.
D. Some firms rent out all their cars during holiday seasons.
( )3. Shanghai’s car rental industry is growing so fast mainly due to ___________.
A. better cars supplied by producers.
B. fast service offered by car rental firms.
C. the increasing number of white-collar emplioyees.
D. people’s growing interest in travelling during holidays.
解析：
1.C。上文提到：“Shanghai Bashi旅游车租赁中心”提供了广泛丰富的选择，可判断选择的内容为可供租赁的车型。故选C。
2.D。文中提到的数据70%为“每月汽车租出量”，故A、B都不正确。“This figure shoots up during holiday seasons …, with some recording 100 percent rental”判断出D项陈述正确的，即“一些公司在节假日里能够把汽车全部租出去。”
3.C。文章最后一段引用“汽车租赁中心市场经理”（Zhuang Yu）的话解释了上海汽车租赁行车迅猛发展的原因根源于“the growing population of white-collar employees”。故选C。
例2：（2004年全国卷II）
Rome had the Forum. London has Speaker’s Corner. Now always–on– the-go New Yorkers have Liz and Bill.
Liz and Bill, two college graduates in their early 20s, have spent a whole year trying to have thousands of people talk to them in subway stations and on busy street corners. Just talk.
Using a 2-foot-tall sign that says,“Talk to Me.”they attract conversatio- nalists, who one evening included a mental patient, and men in business suits.
They don’t collect money. They don’t push religion(宗教). So what’s the point
“To see what happens, said Liz.“We simply enjoy life with open communication（交流）.”
Shortly after the September 11,2001 attacks, they decided to walk from New York City to Washington, a 270-mile trip. They found they loved talking to people along the way and wanted to continue talking with strangers after their return.
“It started as a crazy idea,”Liz said.“We were so curious about all the strangers walking by with their life stories. People will talk to us about anything: their jobs, their clothes, their childhood experiences, anything.”
Denise wanted to talk about an exam she was about to take. She had stopped by for the second time in two days, to let the two listeners know how it went.
Marcia had lost her husband to a serious disease.“That was very heavy on my mind,”Marcia said.“To be able to talk about it to total strangers was very good,”she explained.
To celebrate a year of talking, the two held a get-together in a city park for all the people they had met over the past year. A few hundred people showed up, as well as some television cameramen and reporters.
They may plan more parties or try to attract more people to join their informal talks. Some publishers have expressed interest in a book, something they say they’ll consider.
1. What did Liz and Bill start doing after September 2001
A. Chatting with people. B. Setting up street signs
C. Telling stories to strangers D. Organizing a speaker’s corner
2. What they have been doing can be described as .
A. pointless B. normal C. crazy D. successful
3. Why are Denise and Marcia mentioned in the text
A. They knew Liz and Bill very well.
B. They happened to meet the writer of the text.
C. They organized the get-together in the city park.
D. They are examples of those who talked to Liz and Bill.
4. What will Liz and Bill do in the future
A. Go in for publishing. B. Do more television programs.
C. Continue what they are doing. D. Spend more time reading books.
5. How do they like they idea of writing a book
A. They have decided to wait a year or two
B. They will think about it carefully
C. They agreed immediately
D. They find it hard to do that
解析：
1.A。本篇讲述了两个大学毕业生与陌生人交谈，倾听人们向他们倾述的互惠的活动。文章从联想开始，简介Liz and Bill（这是两个人的名字，又是交谈与倾听活动的名称）做什么，怎样开始的，效果如何，未来打算等，其中等六段和第七段是插叙（从shortly after…到…experiences, anything.），讲述的就是两个年轻人怎样开始这一活动的。故选A项；开始与人聊天。
2.D。Liz and Bill活动很成功。从倒数第二段可知：为庆祝该活动一周所举办的聚会，有许多人参加，记者和摄影师都来了，说明很成功。
3.D。Liz和Bill同许多人谈生活，倾听过许多人跟他们谈心，Denise和Marcia是其中的两人。提到他们来做例子。
4.C。最后一段的前一句说明他们还想吸引更多的人来加入这一活动，与他们聊天。故选C。
5.B。本题问Liz和Bill怎么看待写本书这回事，全篇最后一句可知，但本句结构较复杂。something是代词，是a book的同位语，“they’ll consider”是定语从句，“they say”起到插入语的作用。全句可译为：有些出版商表达了给Liz和Bill 出本书的兴趣，Liz和Bill说他们会考虑这件事。consider一词可解释为think about carefully，“something”指出书写书。故选B。
例3：
My first reaction was annoyance. It was Friday afternoon, and I was within an hour of finishing my work for the week. As I was leaving, a nurse brought me one more patient message. The statement read: “Mrs.Jones called to say that she has had blurred vision（视觉模糊）ever since her medical test this morning.”I smiled. Suddenly our tests were causing eye problems.
This week my patients had questioned everything. My patient with high blood pressure had stopped coming to her treatment on the advice of an Internet chat room. A woman who had a mental problem was substituting(用……代替)St . John’s word for her medication. Now Mrs. Jones was imagining problems. I rolled my eyes.
My second reaction was worry. As I looked through her record, I tried to figure out why she would have blurred vision, but nothing in her record explained the new problem. She’s probably just anxious, I thought. Still, she wouldn’t have called if she had been all right. I picked up the phone.
What I next felt can only be described as delight. Before I made the call, the nurse ran in: Mrs. Jones called. Her vision is fine. Turns out she picked up the wrong glasses when she left the office. The X-raytechnician has been having the same problem. I let out a laugh. Mrs. Jones had been right. Her vision had been blurred. Now we know why.
Finally I felt shame. I came to realize what Mrs. Jones had taught me. I had first known she was wrong, that her anxiety had clouded her judgment. Instead, my medical training had clouded mine. Now I me for my help. They pay me to listen, diagnose（诊断），treat and talk. That suggests trust; I must remember that, and trust them too.
1.The writer smiled while reading the patient message because he knew .
A. Mrs. Jones would ask for more tests
B. the patient was being unreasonable
C. the nurse was joking with him
D. Mrs. Jones would call him
2. What had caused Mrs . Jones’ eye problem
A. Wrong glasses B. Medical checkup.
C. Her own imagination D. Chatting on the Internet
3.The underlined words“clouded her judgment”in the last paragraph probably mean .
A. made her less trustful toward the doctor
B. put her in control of her own feelings
C. made her less able to think clearly
D. put her in a dangerous situation
解析：
1.B。本篇讲一个医生要结束一周的工作时几分钟内的心理历程。一周来，病人们不断怀疑或不信任自己，其中一个病人Mrs.Jones也来电话说上午看完病后眼睛看不清东西，医生先是烦躁，进而担心焦虑是否真的有问题或病人只是在想像，再而是高兴——Mrs.Jones只是戴错了眼镜，自己的诊断治疗没问题。最后是惭愧，病人还是信任自己的，自己也必须信任病人。文章第二段活用了许多过去完成时，说明这些事先发生，许多病人开始没道理地怀疑自己，现在又轮到Mrs.Jones。所以医生知道这位病人有些没理性。
2.A。第四段的前几句说明了Mrs.Jones视力正常，（下班）离开办公室时拿错了眼镜。
3.C。画线部分中cloud作动词用，是用云挡住的意思，整体画线部分应是“影响了她的判断力，使她不能正常思考”，本题可用代入法解决。
例4：
It’s not the flashiest car in the world. Not even close. But the 1971 Volkswagen named Helios can do something most cars can’t : run on solar energy—energy from the sun’s light and head!
Joshua Bechtold, 14,and the other students at the Riverside School in Lyndonville, Vermont, worked They named their car after Helios, the sun god in Greek mythology（神话）。
The 4-year-old Tour de Sol encourages the use of “green”,or environmen- tally friendly, cars to help reduce pollution and save enengy. It’s not a race. Cars are judged on fuel efficiency（耗油量）rather than speed. In the week-long event, 44 cars took the 350-mile tour from Waterbury, Connecticut, to Lake George, New York. Of the 23 student cars, Helios was the only one built by middle school students.
A teacher drove Helios, but the children talked with people wherever they stopped along the road.“That was my favorite part,”says Anna Browne,15.“We explained how the car runs.”
Due in part to old, inefficient batteries（电池），Helios finished fourth—out of four—in its kind, the sun-powered class.“We were there for the fun of it,”Anna says,“We’re proud of Helios,”says Ariel Gleicher, 14.“It’s a car that’s good for the environment.”
1. What is special about the car Helios in the text
A. It was built by middle school students
B. It has an attractive design
C. It was made in 1971
D. It won the fourth prize
2. How many sun-powered cars took part in the race
A. 1 B. 4 C. 23 D. 44
3. What would be the best title for the text
A. The Making of Helios
B. 1999 American Tour de Sol
C. Sun-powered Gars on the Road
D. Use of Green Cars in Connecticut
4. The students felt proud of Helios because .
A. it could run as far as 350 miles
B. it was favored by many children
C. it had high-quality batteries
D. it was driven by clean energy
解析：
1.A。从第一段“run on solar energy”和第二段“Joshua Bechtold,14, and the other students…worked many months to get Helois ready.”可知本车利用太阳能，并且由学生制做。
2.B。从最后一段“Helois finished fourth-out of four-in its kind, the sun-powered class”可知，四辆同类车参赛，Helois得第四名。
3.C。全文讲述Helois这类太阳能车。本文不止讲Helois的制作，排除A。本文讲Helois参赛前后的事，不以赛事为主，排除B。环保汽车的使用不止在Connectinut, 排除D。
4.D。学生们对此车感到自豪是因为该车环保，而非车速或小孩子喜欢，且它的电池旧而效率低，排除其他各项。
例5：
The other day, my friend Jane was invited to a 40th birthday party. The time printed on the invitation was 7:30 pm. Jane went off with her husband, expecting a merry evening of wine, food, and song.
By 9:45,everybody was having great fun, but no food had appeared. Jane and David were restless. Other guests began whispering that they, too, were starving. But no one wanted to leave, just in case some food was about to appear. By 11:00, there was still no food, and everyone was completely off their heads. Jane and David left hungry and angry.
Their experience suggests that the words on the printed invitations need to be made clearer. Everyone reads and understands the invitations differently. Most of us would agree that 6:30—8:30pm means drinks only, go out to dinner afterwards; 8:00pm or 8:30pm means possible dinner, but 9:30pm and any time thereafter means no food, eat beforehand, roll up late.
But this is not always the case. If asked to a students’ party at 6:30pm, it
is normal for guests not to appear before midnight, if at all, and no one cares. Being the first to arrive—looking eager—is social death. When my mother asked to a party for 6:30, she likes to be there, if not on time, then no later than seven. My age group (late thirties)falls somewhere between the two, but because we still think we’re young. We’re probably closer to student-time than grown-up time.
The accepted custom at present is confusing（混乱的），sometimes annoying, and it often means you may go home hungry, but it does lend every part that precious element（成分）of surprise.
1. The underlined words“off their heads”probably mean .
A. tired B. crazy C. curious D. hopeless
2. Jane and David’s story is used to show that .
A. party-goers usually get hungry at parties
B. party invitations can be confusing
C. people should ask for food at parties
D. birthday parties for middle-aged people are dull
3. For some young people, arriving on time for a students’ party will probably be considered .
A. very difficult B. particularly thoughtful
C. friendly and polite D. socially unacceptable
4. According to the writer, people in their late thirties .
A. are likely to arrive late for a party
B. care little about the party time
C. haven’t really grown up yet
D. like surprises at parties
5. What is the general idea of the text .
A. It’s safe to arrive late just when food is served
B. It’s wise to eat something before going to a party
C. It’s important to follow social rules of party-going
D. It’s necessary to read invitations carefully
解析：
1.B。参加晚会的人没吃晚饭，到晚11点，人们饿疯了。
2.B。开头的故事做为例子，说明邀请信函令人迷茫，人们无法把握该如何去做。
3.D。第四段前几句说明，年轻的学生赴晚会迟到很正常。急切地第一个赶到的人太少见了。
4.A。第四段最后提及三十多岁的人参加晚会的时间接近学生的时间，故可能迟到。
5.C。全文可知，不同年龄段的人到达晚会的时间不同，对晚会时间理解不同，不遵从社会习惯，便会出现饿肚子等现象。所以，按社会习俗参加晚会极为重要。
例6：
Cannes will rock to the sound of a cancan dance this year when Moulin Rouge by the Australian director Baz Luhrmann opens the French film festival
(电影节)in May. The musical stars Nicole Kidman as a singer, and John Leguizamo as the artist Henri de Toulouse-Lautree. It will be competing for the palme d’Or, the festival’s top prize. The festival runs to May 21.
The American actor Tommy Lee Jones, 54, has married his longtime girlfriend, Dawn Maria Laurel, 36, in a private wedding in San Antonio.“It wasn’t a big to-do,”said Fred Biery, a U.S. District Judge who performed the service. He refused to discuss things further.“These are very private people,”he said.
Loretta Lynn is being treated for a very bad cold in Tennessee and will miss several appearances. The country singer, 65, was admitted to a hospital near her home in Hurricane Mills.“She is in good condition, but the doctors are watching her closely,”a spokeswoman said.
The French-Algerian singer Enrico Macias was named a United Nations peace messenger. Enrico joins eight other people who act as goodwill envoys（使者）for the United Nations, among them are the writer Elie Wiesel and the basketball player Magie Johnson.
1. We can learn from the text that Henri de Toulouse-Lantree is .
A. a figure in a film B. a dancer in a show
C. a country singer D. a prize winner
2. We know from the text that .
A. Moulin Rouge won the top prize in a film festival
B. Loretta Lynn is under the doctor’s care
C. eight people serve as the UN goodwill enjoys
D. Fred Biery was Tommy Lee Jones’ assistant
3. This text most probably appears in .
A. a book on film stars B. a film review in a magazine
C. a newspaper D. a notice
解析：
1.A。第一段“…and John Leguizamo as the artist Hentti de You-louse－ Lautree.”可知，as前省略了will act, as前的人是一个演员，其后的人是电影中的角色。
2.B。第四段“She (Loretta Lynn)is in good condition, but the doctors are watching her closely”可知答案。Moulin Rough（一部影片）即将参加电影节，尚未获奖，排除A。Enrico Macias同其他八人一道，共九人，排除C。Fred Biery是一个法官，故排除D。
3.C。全文四小段文章均是关于影视娱乐圈的事，应该是从报纸的休闲娱乐栏目中选取的文章。
*9*语法复习专题（14）
Unit14 主谓一致和倒装
一、考点聚焦
1、语法形式上的一致
主语为单数形式，谓语动词用单数形式；主语为复数形式，谓语动词也用复数形式。
The number of students in our school is 1,700.
Mary and Kelly look alike.
2、意义上一致
（1）主语形式虽为单数，但意义为复数，谓语动词用复数。
The crowd were runing for their lives.
单数形式代表复数内容的词有people、police、cattle等。
（2）主语形式为复数，而意义上却是单数，谓语动词用单数。The news is very exciting.
形复意单的单词有new、works（工厂）、means和以ics结尾的学科名称physics、poli-tics、economics等。
3、就近原则。即谓语动词的单复数形式取决于最靠近它的词语。如果连词or、either … or、neither … nor、not only … but also等连接的并列主语，如果一个是单数，一个是复数，谓语动词与靠近它的主语一致。
Either you or I am mad.
4、应注意的若干问题
（1）名词作主语。
①某些集体名词如family、team等作主语时，如果作为一个整体看待，谓语用单数，反之用复数。
My family is going out for a trip.
The whole family are watching TV.
这类词常有audience、class club、committee、company、crew、crowd、enemy、government、group、party、public、team等。
Population和“a group(crowd)of + 复数名词”也适用于这种情况，强调整体用单数，强调各个部分用复数。
②某些集体名词如people、police、cattle、oxen只当复数看待，谓语动词必须用复数。
③单、复数同形的名词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义决定单、复数。
A sheep is over there. Some sheep are over there.
④名词所有格之后的名词被省略，这种情况一般只指商店、工场、住宅等；作主语时，动词一般用单数。My uncle’s is not for from here.
常见的省略名词有the baker’s 、the barbar’s、the Zhang’s等。
表示店铺的名词一般作集体名词看待，但用作主语时，谓语动词往往用复数。如：
Richardson’s have a lot of old goods to sell.
⑤当名词词组中心词为表示度量、距离、金额、时间、书名等复数名词时，往往可以根据意义一致的原则，把这些复数名词看作一个整体，谓语用单数。
Thirty years has passed.
Five minutes is enough to finish the task.
⑥不定代词each、every、no所修饰的名词即使以and或逗号连接成多主语时，谓语动词仍用单数形式。如：
Each boy and each girl in my class has a dictionary.
⑦如果主语有more than one … 或many a … 构成，尽管从意义上
看是复数内容，但它的谓语动词用单数形式。
More than one student has seen the play.
Many a boy has bought that kind of toy.
但是，“more + 复数名词 + than one”结构之后，谓语用复数。
⑧一些由两个部分构成的名词表示衣物或工具作主语时，谓语通常用复数形式。如glasses、clothes、trousers、shoes、compasses、chopsticks、scissors等。
但如果主语用a kind of、a pair of、a series of等加名词构成时，谓语动词一般用单数形式。
A pair of shoes was on the desk.
⑨this kind of book = a book of this kind(这种书)，其谓语动词；短语this kind of men = men of this kind = these kind of
men(口语)（这一类人），但this kind of men的谓语用单数，men of this kind和these kind of men的谓语用复数，all kinds of后跟复数名词，谓语用复数形式。如：
This kind of men is dangerous.
Men of theis kind/sort are dangerous.
⑩复数形式的单、复数同形名词作主语时，按意义一致的原则，用作单数意义时，谓语用单数，反之，谓语用复数。这类名词有means、works、species(种类)、Chinese、Japanese等。当它们的前面有 a、such a、this、that修饰时，谓语用单数；有all、such、these、those修饰时，谓语用复数。
如果名词词组中心词是all、most、half、rest等词语，所指是复数意义，谓语动词用复数形式，反之用单数。
All of my students work hard.
All of the oil is gone.
在主谓倒装的句子中，谓语动词的数应与其后的主语一致。如：
Between the two windows hangs an oil painting.
（2）由连接词连接的名词作主语。
①用and或both … and 连接并列主语，谓语动词通常用复数形式。但如果并列主语指的是同一个人，同一事物或同一概念时，谓语动词用单数形式，这时and后面的名词没有冠词。
Truth and honesty is the best policy.
To love and to be loved is the great happiness.
Going to bed early and getting up early is a good habit.
A knife and fork is on the table.
②当主语后面跟有as well as、as much as、no less than、along with、with、like、rather than、together with、but、except、besides、including、in addition to等引导的词组时，采取“就远原则”。
③以or、either … or、neigher … nor、not only … but also等连接的词作主语时，采取“就近原则”。
（3）代词作主语。
①名词型物主代词连接的动词，既可以用单数，也可以用复数，这取决于它所代替的是单数还是复数。
Ours (Our Party) is a great Party.
Your shoes are white, mine (= my shoes) are black.
②such、the same起指示代词作用时，应根据其所指的内容来决定单、复数。
Such is our plan. Such are his last words.
③关系代词who、that、which等在定语从句中作主语时，其谓语动词的数应与句中先行词的数一致。
④疑问词who、what、which作主语时，谓语动词可根据说话人所要表达的意思决定单、复数。
Who lives next door It is Xiao Liu.
Who lives next door It is Wang and Li.
⑤不定代词any、either、neither、none、all、some、more等作主语时，要注意下列情况：
（A）单独作主语时，视其在文中的意义，动词可用单数或复数形式。Now all has been changed. All are present.（B）其后接of时，若of的宾语为不可数名词，动词用单数形式；若of的宾语为复数名词或代词时，动词可以是单数，也可以是复数；在正式文体中，单数形式的动词更常用。Do (es) any of you know about the accident None of us has
(have) seen the film.
（4）分数、量词作主语。
①“分数或百分数 +　名词”构成的短语以及由“a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a large quantity of, a heap of, heaps of, half of + 名词”构成的短语作主语时，其谓语动词要与短语中of后面的名词的数保持一致，这是因为短语中后面的名词是中心词，而短语中前面的量词是修饰语。如：
Lots of damage was caused by flood.
A number of students have gone to the countryside.
A large quantity of people is needed here.
Quantities of food (nuts) were still on the table.
②a great deal of、a large amount of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用单数；large amounts of修饰不可数名词，其短语作主语时，谓语动词通常用复数。
③表示数量的one and a half后，名词要用复数形式，但是其短语作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
One and a half apples is left on the table.
④half of、(a)part of修饰可数名词单数及不可数名词时，谓语动词用单数，修饰可数名词复数时，谓语动词用复数。
(5)名词化的形容词作主语。
如果主语由“the + 形容词（或分词）”结构担任时，谓语通常用复数。这类词有the rich、the poor、the brave、the injured、the living、the wounded等。如表抽象的也可以用单数，如the unknown、the beautiful等。
（6）从句作主语。
①由what引导的主语从句，谓语动词通常用单数，但所指的具体内容是复数意义时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。
What we need is more money.
What we need are more people/teachers.
②在“one of + 复数名词 + who/that/which”引导的从句结构中，关系代词who/that/which的先行词是靠近它的复数名词而不是one，因此从句中的谓语动词也应该是复数形式。如one前有the only则用单数形式。
This is one of the most interesting stories that have been told by my father.
She was the only one of the girls who was late for class today.
（7）不定式、名动词（短语）作主语用单数形式；There be句型中be的单复数取决于be后的第一个词的数。
There is a book, two pens on the desk.
There are two pens, a book on the desk.
5、倒装句的要点复习
（1）在以there、here、now、then、such引导的，引起人们注意的招呼句要倒装。
There goes the bell. Here comes the bus.
（2）表示动态的状语，置于句首时，句子要倒装。
Off went the horse. In came the boss.
From the speaker comes the doctor’s voice.
（3）表示地点的词语置于句首或强调地点概念时。
South of the town lie two steel factories.
Between the two buildings stands a tall tree.
注意：句子的主语为人称代词时，句子不倒装。
Here it is. Away they went.
（4）否定词never、seldom、hardly、scarcely、barely、rarely、little、not、nowhere、by no means、at no time、neither、nor等放在句首时，句子常倒装。如：
By no means shall we give up.
Never have I been to the USA.
Seldom does she get up late in the morning.
（5）在not only … but also … no sooner … than …、hardly … when …、scarcely … when …、not until …、so … that …、such … that …句型中，主句倒装，从句不倒装，但要注意：neither … nor … 连接的句子前后两个分句都要倒装。
Not only is she smart but also she is beautiful.
Such great progress did he make that he was praised.
So heavy is the box that I can’t carry it.
Neither has he a pencil, nor has he a pen.
（6）Only + 状语或状语从句 +其他（only在句首时要倒装）。
Only then did I realize the importance of learning English.
（7）so、neither、nor放在句首时，表示前面的情况也适用于另一个人或物时，用部分倒装。
（8）表语或状语或动词原形 + as/though + 主语 + 其他时，句子要倒装。（在让步状语从句中）
（9）虚拟语气中用倒装代替if。
Were I you, I would go there at once.
Had you come yesterday, you could have helped us.
（10）在一些表示祝愿的句子中。
Long live China!
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.—Each of the students, working hard at his or her lessons, _________to go to university.
—So do I .(上海 1998)
A.hope B.hopes C.hoping D.hoped
解析：答案为B。本题考查主谓一致中的意义一致原则，不定代词either、neither、each、one、the other、another以及所有的复合不定代词作主语时，谓语动词应根据意义一致的原则采用单数形式，排除A。选项C是非谓语动词的一种，不能单独作谓语，亦应排除。根据答语中的时态又可排除选项D。
2.The number of people invited _________ fifty, but a number of them __________ absent for different reasons.（NMET 1996）
A.were; was B.was; was C.was; were D.were; were
解析：答案为C。本题考查the number of和a number of 的区别。“the number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是number,“a number of + 复数名词/代词”结构中的中心词是of后的复数名词或代词，故谓语动词分别用单、复数。解题关键在于仔细区分哪个是真正的主语。
3.—David has made great progress recently.
—_______, and __________.(上海 1997)
A.So he has; so you have B.So he has; so have you
C.So has he; so have you D.So has he; so you have
解析：答案为B。 本题考查倒装知识。“So + 主语 + 助动词”表“确实如此”，“So + 助动词 + 主语”表“也一样。”
4.—I would never ever come to this restaurant again. The food is terrible!
— .
A. Nor am I B. Neither would I
C. Same with me D. So do I
解析：答案为B。本题主要考倒装，以so/nor/neither开头的倒装句子，在时态、语态、助动词、情态动词等谓语形式上，要尽可能与上文一致，故选B，排除A、D。如说“It’s the same with me”也可，但不能省略“the”。
5.The teacher, with 6 girls and 8 boys of her class, visiting a museum when the earthquake struck.
A. was B. were C. had been D. would be
解析：答案为A。本题考查主谓一致及时态知识，句子的主语是the teacher, 后面跟with结构表补充说明，谓语应该与最前面的主语，即the teacher一致，应用单数，又因事情发生在地震的时候，因此应该用过去进行时。
6. snacks and drinks, but they also brought cards for entertainment when they had a picnic in forest.
A. Not only they brought B. Not only did they bring
C. Not only brought they D. Not only they did bring
解析：答案为B。此题考查倒装句的用法not only…but等有否定意义的连词及副词位于句首，句子使用部分倒装，故选B。
*6*语法复习专题（11）
Unit11 名词性从句
一、考点聚焦
1、名词性从句中连接词的运用
名词性从句中的连接词有连词that / whether / as if，连接代词what / who/ which / whose / whatever / whoever / whomever / whichever，连接副词where / when / why / how / wherever / whenever。
（1）that的用法。
①主语从句、表语从句、同位语从句中用that但不能省略。如：
That they are good at English is known to us all.
The problem is that we don’t have enough money.
She expressed the hope that they would come to China one day.
②宾语从句中的连接词that有时可省有时又不可省，在以下几种情况中that不能省略：（A）当that从句和主句谓语动词之间有插入词语或者从句主语之间有插入语时，that不可省略；（B）当that 从句与另一名词性从句并列作宾语时，that不能省；（C）当that作介词宾语时，that不可省掉。如：
He judged that,because he was a child, he did not understand
wine
Everyone knew what happened and that she was worried.
The reason lies in that she works harder than the others do.
③that从句作主语和宾语时，可以用it 来替换成以下几种结构表达。
(A)It is clear/certain/likely/true/surprising that… （B）It is a pity/shame/good idea/no wonder that ...（C）It is said/reported/ believed/known/thought/suggested that … （D）It seems/happens that。如：
It happened that I went out last night.
It is said that China will win in the World Cup.
④that和what的区别。
that 引导名词性从句时，在主从句中不以当任何句子成分，也没有任何含义；而what引导名词性从句时，在主从句中都要充当一定的句子成分，what可以分解成定语从句中的先行词 + 关系代词即常说的先行词 + that。如：
It’s shame that he has made such a mistake. Do what he says.
⑤同位语从句与定语从句中that的区别。
同位语从句中的连词that只起连接作用，在从句中不担当任何句子成分；而定语从句中的关系代词that在句中做宾语或主语，宾语与先行词有修饰关系。如果句子是同位语从句，就应用连词that而不能用which.同位语从句一般放在表具体含义的名词后解释名词的含义或内容，如以下名词：news、fact、suggestion、truth、plan、belief、doubt、possibility、idea等，而定语从句只是对先行词的限定和修饰。如：
They expressed the hope that they would come to visit China again.(同位语从句)
The hope she expressed is that they would come to visit China again.（定语从句）
（2）whether和if的用法。
①whether和if在宾语从句中可以互换，但是作介词宾语时连接词一般用whether。如：
It all depends on whether they will come back.
②后面直接跟or not 时用whether。如：
I didn’t know whether or not he had arrived in Wuhan.
③主语从句表语从句中只能用whether。如：
Whether the meeting will be put off has not been decided yet.
The question is whether they have so much money.
④whether可以引导同位语从句，用以说明前面的名词的内容，if不能。如：
We ought to discuss carefully the question whether we can do
it or not.
⑤whether常与or连用表示一种选择，if不能这样用；whether也可与动词不定式连用但if不能。如：
The question of whether they are male or female is not impor-
tant.
I have not decided whether to go or not.
⑥间接引语位于句首时或者是间接引语提前时用whether不用if。如：
Thank you, but whether I’ll be free I’m not sure at the moment.
⑦whether可引导一个让步状语从句表示“不管”、“无论”，而if不能。如：
Whether he comes or not, we will begin our party on time.
（3）疑问词 + ever和no matter + 疑问词的区别。
①疑问词 + ever可引导名词性从句，在主从句中要充当一定的部分。如：
Whoever breaks the rule must be punished.
You can choose whatever you like in the shop.
②疑问词 + ever还可引导让步状语从句。如：
Whoever breaks the rule, he must be punished,
Whatever you do, you must do it well.
③no matter + 疑问词只能引导让步状语从句。如：
No matter what you do, you must do it well.
No matter who breaks the rule, he must be punished.
（4）when和where引导的同位语从句与定语从句的区别。
when 和where前面的名词若是表示时间、地点的名词，则when和where引导的是定语从句，否则则为同位语从句。如：
They put forward the question where they could get the money.
This is the place where the accident happened.
2、名词性从句中主句和从句的时态一致
（1）宾语从句中主句和从句的时态保持一致，但如果从句中表示提示的是客观现象，虽然主句是过去时态，从句仍用一般现在时。如：
Hello,I didn’t know you were in London. How long have you been here
The teacher told us that light travels at a very high speed.
（2）主语从句作主语相当于单数第三人称作主语，谓语动词用单数，如果由and 连接两个或两个以上的主语从句作主语时，谓语动词用复数；由两个或多个连接词引导一个主语从句，谓语动词用单数。如：
When the meeting will begin has not been decided yet.
When they will start and where they go have not been decided yet.
When and where the meeting will begin has not been decided.
3、名词性从句的词序
名词性从句在句中要用陈述句语序。如：
He asked me what was the matter with me.
We’ve heard the news that we’ll move into the new house.
Whatever you say will interest us all.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. A computer can only do ________ you have instructed it to do.(NMET 2001)
A.how B.after C.what D.when
解析：答案为C。本题考查的是名词性从句作宾语的用法。此句的引导词既作连词又在宾语从句中充当一成分，故what最合适。
2. —I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week..
—Is that _________ you had a few days off (NMET 99)
A.why B.when C.what D.where
解析：答案为A。此题考查的是从句的用法。根据题意“我上周开车去珠海看航空展去了。”下面一句接着问：“那就是你为什么离开的原因吗？”故用why引导表语从句表示原因。
3. I hate __________ when peope talk with their mouths full.(NMET 98)
A.it B.that C.these D.them
解析：答案为A。本题考查的是形式宾语的用法。题意为“我讨厌人们谈话时嘴里塞满东西”。该空白处没有任何含义，而且已经用了when连接该宾语从句，所以此处只填一个形式宾语it。
4.I think Father would like to know I’ve been up to so far, so I decide to send him a quick note.
A. which B. why C. what D. how
解析：答案为C。考查宾语从句连词用法，由结构sb. be up to sth.可知，应选what作介词to的宾语。
5.We cannot figure out quite a number of insects, birds, and animals are dying out.
A. that B. as C. why D. when
解析：答案为C。本题考查宾语从句知识，figure out为及物动词，故此句为宾语从句，从句意得知连词在从句中作原因状语，故选why.
6.After Yang Liwei succeeded in circling the earth, our astronauts desire do is walk in space.
A. where B. what C. that D. how
解析：答案为B。此题句子为时间状语从句，全主句的主语是由主语从句来充当的，并且主语从句中不定式动词do缺少宾语，故选what。
*4*语法复习专题（9）
Unit9 非谓语动词
一、考点聚焦
1、非谓语动词的句法功能
名称 语 法 功 能
主语 宾语 宾语补足语 表语 定语 状语
不定式 √ √ √ √ √ √
动名词 √ √ √ √
现在分词 √ √ √ √
过去分词 √ √ √ √
2、动词不定式复心中应注意的几个问题
（1）不定式作表语与“be + to do sth.”的异同。不定式作表语说明主语的内容或性质。
His job is to guard.(说明内容)
be + to do sth.(表示按计划要做的事)
（2）带不定式作宾语的词语。
下列词语常不定式作宾语：afford、promise、refuse、expect、hope、learn、offer、wish、want、fail、plan、agree、forget、like、prefer、decide、manage、try、arrange、determine、desire等。
下列动词后可接疑问词+不定式：teach、decide、wonder、show、learn、forget、ask、find、out、advise、discuss等。
（3）如何理解和使用不定式作宾补。
①动词see、watch、notice、hear、listen to、observe、feel、taste、smell、make、let、have等的宾补用动词原形，变被动时要加to,此时的不定式就是主语补足语。
②常用带不定式作宾补的几种情况：
主语 + ask / require / tell / order / force / get / want / like + sb.to do sth.
③主语 + think / judge / suppose / believe / consider /imagine/
consider / feel + sb. + to be/ to have done
④主语 + call on / upon / depend on / wait for / ask for + sb.+ to do sth.
（4）不定式作定语的特殊用法。
①下列词语后常接不定式作定语：chance、wish、right、courage、need、promise、time、opportunity、way、the first、the second、the last、the only等。
②不定式作定语和所修饰的名词在逻辑上有主谓关系。
There is no one to look after her.
③不定式与被修饰的名词在逻辑上有动宾关系。
She is now looking for a room to live in.
（5）不定式作状语的用法。
不定式作状语，修饰动词，在句中表示行为目的、结果、原因。only to do表示出人意料的结果。
We hurried to the classroom only to find none there .
in order(not)to,so as(not)to用来引导目的状语,enough,too, so… as to do, such + 名词… as to do作结果状语，如:The girl was so kind as to help the old man off the bus.
I’m not such a fool as to believe that.
（6）不定式的完成时的特殊用法。
①表示不定式中谓语动词发生的动作先于主句的谓语动词发出的动作。
The novel was said to have been published.
I regret to have been with you for so many years.
seem、appear、be said、be supposed、be believed、be thought、be known、be reported等动词常用于上面句型。
此外，glad、happy、satisfied、sorry、surprised、disappointed后也接完成时，但要注意与一般时的区别。
I’m sorry to keep you waiting for a minute.对不起，请稍等。（说话时还未等）
I’m sorry to have kept you waiting.对不起，让你久等了。（说话时已等了很久）
②不定式的完成时还可表示“过去本想做某事但未做”的虚拟语气。（A）should like to / would like to / would love to + 不定式的完成时。（B）was / were to + 不定式的完成时，表示该做某事或想做但未实现。（C）expect / hope / mean / promise / suppose / think / want/ wish + 不定式完成时，表示过去未曾实现的愿望。
（7）不定式的省略。
①同一结构并列由and或or连接。
I want to finish my homework and go home.
I’m really puzzled what to think or say.
特例：To be or not to be,this is a question.
He is better to laugh than to cry.(表示对比)
②不定式作表语，其前面的主语从句中含有do时，后面的to省略。
What he did was lose the game.
③句中含有动词do时，but、except、besides、such as等后面to可省略。即“前有do,后省to”。
Don’t do anything silly, such as marry him.
④主句含有不定式，后面有rather than, rather than后省to。
⑤Why not、had better、would rather、can’t but等词后省to。如：
He could not but walk home.
（8）不定式的替代。
多用在同一句或联系紧密的对话中，为了避免重复，作宾语或主补，宾补的不定式再次出现时，to后的内容常承前省略（只保留to即可）。但如果承前省略的不定式有助动用的have或be任何形式，后应该保留原形be或have。如：
Susan is not what she used to be.
—You came late last night. You ought to have finished your
homework.
—I know I ought to have.
常见的有：I’d like / love / be happy to.
3、动名词复习中应注意的几个问题
（1）动名词作宾语。
①下列动词后只能接动名词：suggest, finish, avoid, stop, can’t help, mind, enjoy, require, practise, miss, escape, pardon, advise, consider, imagine, keep, appreciate, eacape, permit。
②下列动词短语接动名词：leave off, put off, give up, look forward to, feel like, have trouble / difficulty(in) doing sth. devote to, get used to, pay attention to, be fond of, be worth。
③介词后要接动名词。what about、how about、without、be fond of、be good at等介词后接动名词。注意on / upon doing sth. = as soon as 引导的从中。作此意讲时on / upon后也可以接名词。如on his arrival…。
④动名词作宾语和动词不定式作宾语的区别：
begin, start, continue, like, love, dislike, hate, prefer, can’t stand
例 句 解 析
1. It began to rain. It began raining.2. It was beginning to snow.3. I love lying (to lie)on my back.4. I like listening to music, but today I don’t like to.5. I don’ t prefer to swim in the river now. 1. 意思无差别，但谓语动词用进行时，后面只跟不定式。2. 表示一种倾向多接动名词作宾语，如果表示某一特定的或具体的行动，多接不定式。
remember, forget, regret, try
例 句 解 析
1. I remember to meet her at the station.I remember seeing her once somewhere.2. I forgot giving it to you yesterday. I forgot to tell you about it. Now here it is.3. I regret not having working hard. I regret to hear of your sister’s death. 4. Try knocking at the back door. We must try to get everything ready.5. That will mean flooding some land. I had meant to go on Monday. 1. remember to do sth.记住要做的事 remember doing sth.回顾过去发生的事2. forget to do sth.忘记要做的事 forget doing sth.忘记做过的事3. regret to do sth.对将要做的事抱歉 regret doing sth.对发生过的事后悔4. try to do sth.设法……，试图 try doing sth.试试看，试一试5. mean to do sth.打算做……，想要 mean doing sth.意味着，就是
want, require, need
例 句 解 析
These desks need repairing.These desks need to be repaired.The patient required examinedThe patient required to be examined. 1. need doing 需要被做 need to be done需要被做2. want doing want to be done3. require doing require to be done
4、分词复习应注意的几个问题
（1）现在分词在句中作时间、原因、伴随、条件、结果等状语。
①时间状语（分词作状语前面可加when, while等）
Hearing the good news, he jumped with greatjoy.
Not having finished her work in time, the boss fired her.
②原因状语
Seeing nobody at home, he decided to leave them a note
③伴随状语
The girls came in, following their parents.
④结果状语
The poor old man died, leaving nothing to his children.
注意：现在分词作状语的几个特性。①时间性。与谓语动词同时发生，用一般时，如发生在谓语动作之前时则用完成式having done。②语态性。与句子的主语之间的关系，是主谓关系或动宾关系。遵循的规则“主动进行，被动完成”。③人称一致性。分词的逻辑主语就是句子的主语。
（2）分词作表语。
S. + be + 动词-ed表示被动，主语是人；S. + be + 动词-ing表示主动，主语是物。分词作宾补不定式作宾补的区别：
感官动词 动词原形→做了某事
S．+ + 宾语 + 现在分词→正在做某事
使役动词 过去分词→做了或被做
5、复习过去分词应注意的几个问题
过去分词作状语，相当于一个状语从句，有来说明原因、时间、条件等。
（1）过去分词作原因状语
Tired by the trip, he soon feel asleep.
= Because he was tired by the trip, he soon fell asleep.
Lost in thought , he almost ran into a car.
=As he was lost in thought, he almost ran into a car.
（2）作时间状语
Seen from the hill, the city looks like a garden.
=When the city is seen from the hill, it looks like a garden.
（3）作条件状语
Given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
=If I have been given more time, I would have worked out the problem.
（4）伴随状语
The teacher came in, followed by some students.
=The teacher came in and was followed by some students.
分词短语作状语时，通常与主句中的主语在逻辑上一致，但有时它也可以有自己独立的逻辑上的主语，这种结构称为独立主格结构。如：
Her grandfather being ill, she had to stay at home looking after him.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1. __________such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.(NMET 2001)
A.Having suffered B.Suffering C.To suffer D.Suffered
解析：答案为A。本题考查分词短语作状语的用法。分词作状语，其逻辑主语必须是句子的主语，而本句的主语看似是it,其实它为形式主语，真正的主语为不定式，而不定式省略了逻辑主语for people，所以应用现在分词，又因already，应用完成时。
2. One learns a language by making mistakes and _______ them.(2001年春季高考)
A.correct B.correcting C.corrects D.to correct
解析：答案为B。本题考查动名词作介词宾语的用法。介词by意为“通过……，凭……”，后面常接动名词，形成“by+ v. –ing ”结构，表示通过做某事而得到某种结果。本题中只有correcting符合。
3. The picture _________ on the wall is painted by my nephew.(2000年春季高考)
A.having hung B.hanging C.hangs D.being hung
解析：答案为B。本题考查现在分词作定语的用法。根据句意“墙上挂的那幅画是我侄子画的”，可知空白处所填的动词形式在句中作定语，表说话时仍在进行的动作或所处的解题关键在于分析picture与hang之间的逻辑关系。
4.“We can’t go out in this weather,”said Bob, out of the window.
A. looking B. to look C. looked D. having looked
解析：答案为A。本句考非谓与动词作伴随状语。全句合理的句意是：Bob看着窗外说，“我们不能在这种天气出去”。Bob在说话的同时在看着窗外，应使用现在分词一般式，表主动和进行。A项正合语境。B项不定式表主动、将来的动作。C项表被动完成的动作（上处不是并列谓语）。D项表完成的主动动作，均不和语境。
5.Reading is an experience quite different from watching TV; there are pictures in your mind instead of before your eyes.
A. to form B. form C. forming D. having formed
解析：答案为C。全句意为：读书是一种与看电视相当不同的体验，有画面在你的心中，而不是在你的眼前形成。所以本题考非谓语动词，表主动且进行着的动作。人们看书时，读到什么情节或场面，这样的情节或场面便（同时）在心中形成。
6.The news reporters hurried to the airport, only the film stars had left.
A. to tell B. to be told C. telling D. told
解析：答案为B。本题考查非谓语用法。only + to do 常用此结构作结果状语，tell及物动词，tell之后常带双宾结构，故tell采用被动形式。
*6*第二部分 题型专项
书面表达
一、考点聚焦
书面表达题旨在测试考生的英语表达能力，看其是否能够运用学过的英语知识和掌握的技能进行思想交流。从历年高考试卷来看，书面表达是指导性写作，即按照题目所给的目的、时间、对象、地点、内容、长度等条件去完成写作。它不同于命题作文，可以随意发挥；也不是简单的句子翻译。必须做到行文切题，紧扣中心思想，不漏要点，并且意思连贯，文理通顺，语言准确、得当。
二、应试技巧点拨
1.首先要认真审题。读懂题目所给信息，初步确定要点内容，并可用序号标出以免遗忘。
2.列题纲使用要点条理化，序化，统筹安排布局。
3.勿要直译，需意译。尤其对看图情景作文要构建完整故事结构，不可逐句罗列了事。
4.要刻意把好语言关。要用自己最熟悉的句型结构和词语，力求文理通顺，语言准确。没有把握的词句不要写，确有把握的的可以锦上添花。
5.遇到一时想不起的词语，需变通。可以用同义近义词代替，也可以用否定词加反义词来表达，亦可变换句式。不可钻牛角尖，更不能生造词语，汉化表达。
6.注意文章的长度。看具体内容而定，如果内容多应多用复杂句式，如果内容不多，为了达到词的限数应多用简单句式，并适当增补合理内容。
7.注意保持卷面整洁，书写工整清楚，书写的好坏会直接影响阅卷老师的情绪。
8.最后应注意复查全文。看内容要点有无遗漏，标点、格式、大小写是否规范，是否有语病等。
三、精典范例
例1 （NMET 2001）
假设你是李华，你的澳大利亚朋友Dick听说中国的中小学正在减轻学生的学习负担，来信询问有关情况。请你根据下表提供的信息，写一封回信，谈一谈减负给你的学习和生活带来的变化。
周末活动（减负前） 周末活动（减负后）
白天：上课、做作业 白天：参观博物馆，学习电脑、绘画等
晚上：做作业 晚上：看新闻、读书、看报
就寝时间：11:30 就寝时间：10:30
注意：1.词数100左右。2.开头已为你写好。
生词：reduce learning load减轻学习负担
Dear Dick,
How nice to hear from you again.
Best wishes,
Li Hua
解析
NMET 2001 年高考书面表达试题要求考生根据以表格的形式提供的情景用英语写一篇100个单词左右的书信，给澳大利亚朋友Dicl介绍减负给自己学习和生活带来的变化。写作过程中所需要的生词已给出，短文的开头也已经为考生写好。
写作过程：
1.认真审题，明确要求。
①由汉语提示可知，应用第一人称完成短文；
②在写作过程中，要突出减负给学习生活带来的便利；
③在写作过程中，要根据表格中的中文提示，写成一篇行文连贯、条理清楚的文章而不宜将表格中的中文直译成英语。
2.审视表格，列出要点。
①过去忙于上课、做作业；
②现在有时间看新闻、参观博物馆等；
③现在有时间看新闻、读报纸；
④不必再熬夜。
3.依据要点，编拟提纲。
1 I used to have to do endless homework and attend classes even
at weekends.
②Now I have more free time to read books, visit museums even
and so on.
③In the evenings I can watch news on TV or read newspapers.④I can go to bed earlier.
4.按照文体，组织语篇。
One possible version:
Dear Dick,
How nice to hear from you again. You want to known what is going on in schools in China In short, things have begun to improve since schools were called on to reduce learning load. I don’t know about others, but I used to have to work even at weekends doing endless homework and attending classes as well. Now I have more free time, I can follow my own interests such as reading books, visiting museums, and taking computer lessons. In the evenings I can watch news on TV or read newspapers. What’s more, I can go to bed earlier. As far as I know, everyone is happy about this new arrangement of things.
Best wishes,0
Li Hua
【例2】（2004年全国卷I）
假设你是李华，你在报上看到北京电视台今年七月将举办外国人“学中文，唱中文歌”才艺大赛。你的美国朋友Peter正在北京一所大学学中文，你觉得他应去试一试。请按以下要点给他写信告知此事，并表示可以提供帮助。比赛时间：7月18日
报名时间：截止到6月30日
报名地点：北京电视台
注意：1.词数：100左右
2.可适当增加细节，以使行文连贯。
3.参考词汇：才艺大赛talent show
Dear Peter,
I read in a newspaper today that a “Learn Chinese, Sing Chinese Songs”Foreigners, Talent Show will be held in Beijing Television Station on July 18. I know you like singing, and you are in Beijing during that period. I think this is a good chance for you to show your singing talent, and how well you’ve learned Chinese. If you would like to try, you’ll have to go to the TV station to sign up before the end of June. If there is anything I can do for you, I would be more than glad to help.
Yours,
Li Hua
【例3】（2004年全国卷II）
假设你是李华，加拿大一所学校将于今年暑假组织学生来你校访问。其间，Andy Smith将借住你家。请你代表全家写信给Andy,欢迎他的到来，并告知有关事宜。信的要点如下：
*上午：学校活动
*下午：游览市区
*晚上；看电视、玩游戏，聊天
注意：1.词数：100左右
2.可适当增加细节，以使行文连贯
3.参考词汇：安排—arrange
Dear Andy,
I am glad to learn that you are coming co China and will stay at my home.
My parents and I are very pleased to have you with us. Now let me tell you what we have arranged for you. I know the school will organize a lot of things for you to do in the morning, but I the afternoon, I’ll show you around and take you to some places of interest. We’ll mostly stay at home in the evening watching TV, playing games, and meeting people. I’m sure we’ll have a wonderful time and enjoy each other’s company.
I’m looking forward very much to meeting you soon.
Yours sincerely,
Li Hua
【例4】（2004年全国卷Ⅲ）
假设你是李华，你的美国老师Miss Morgan要求你们明天下午去听一个美国历史的讲座。你因故不能参加。请你根据以下要点，写一封信向Miss Morgan请假。
内容要点：
*表示歉意
*理由：去机场接人
*询问：是否有录音，以便补听讲座
注意：1.词数：100左右
2.可根据内容要点适当增加细节，以使行文连贯。
Dear Miss Morgan,
I am so sorry that I won’t be able to attend the lecture on American history tomorrow afternoon, My uncle is returning home from France, and I have promised to meet him at the airport at 3:30 tomorrow afternoon.
I am very much interested in American society and history. I wonder if it is possible for the talk to be recorded; and if so, could I borrow the tape It would mean a great deal to me to listen to the tape and learn what is covered in the talk.
Yours sincerely,
Li Hua
*4*